Best Electric Egg Cookers

Best Electric Egg Cookers 2018

When searching for the best electric egg cookers, it helps to get the inside scoop from connoisseurs.  And, we are proud to admit that we are self-proclaimed connoisseurs of the electric egg cooker.

So, about a couple of months ago, we went on a camping excursion where our hosts cooked us up some soft-boiled eggs, every morning, from an electric egg cooker.  And, we were completely blown away by how perfectly soft-boiled these eggs turned out.  Was it really that quick, easy and delicious?

In addition, not only did these eggs turn out exactly how you set them to cook, they were the best eggs we have ever divulged in.  Especially the soft-boiled eggs…they were like a glass of fine wine and we find the appropriate word here to be smooth.  It seems sort of weird to describe eggs as smooth but that is exactly how they turned out.

Best Electric Egg Cookers

And, with this new-found discovery, we sadly came back home to an electric egg cooker-less house.  Therefore, we needed to get an egg cooker right away to soothe our morning appetite.

So, we started searching for the best electric egg cookers and narrowed the results down to the most highly reviewed electric egg cookers on the market.  And what was important to us in the reviews were a few things.  Namely, deliciously cooked eggs time and time again.

This means, we payed close attention to the reviews that are heavy on the results side.  We wanted perfect eggs cooked consistently.

Then, we further focused in on the user reviews where durability is a factor.  We don’t want to be stuck with a burnt-out electric egg cooker when we need it the most.

Finally, we were on a budget with this new purchase – it took us by surprise so we didn’t calculate this new-found luxury.  Therefore, we chose a budget model for our electric egg cooker.

However, we also chose some other models that are on our dream list.  So, whether you’re on a budget or you’re looking for a high-end electric egg cooker, you can find what you need on our list of best electric egg cookers.

 

Best Electric Egg Cookers

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Elite Platinum EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker
Elite Platinum
EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker
7 Egg Capacity
Measuring Cup
Piercer
Egg Tray
Poaching Tray
Automatic Shutoff
Color Options
7.7" x 6.7" x 7.7"
Cuisinart CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker
Cuisinart
CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker
10 Egg Capacity
Measuring Cup
Piercer
Egg Tray
Omelet Tray
Poaching Tray
Automatic Shutoff
Audible Alert
Built-in Cord
Color Options
6.3" x 7.3" x 7.8"
KRUPS F23070 Egg Cooker with Water Level Indicator
KRUPS
F23070 Egg Cooker with Water Level Indicator
7 Egg Capacity
Measuring Cup
Piercer
Egg Tray
2 Poaching Trays
Automatic Shutoff
Audible Alert
7.7" x 6.4" x 5.5"
Dash Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker
Dash
Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker
12 Egg Capacity
Measuring Cup
Piercer
Egg Tray
Omelet Tray
Automatic Shutoff
Audible Alert
Color Options
9" x 10" x 8"
SimpleTaste Electric Egg Cooker
SimpleTaste
Electric Egg Cooker
7 Egg Capacity
Measuring Cup
Piercer
Egg Tray
Poaching Tray
Automatic Shutoff
7.4" x 6.3" x 6.3"

 

Best Electric Egg Cookers

Elite Platinum EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker

Elite Platinum EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker

So, this is the electric egg cooker we chose and we couldn’t be happier with it.  The Elite Platinum EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker cooks perfect eggs every time.  And, like we mentioned above, we were on a budget so this egg cooker is priced to sell.

This pick on our list of best electric egg cookers can boil up to 7 eggs at a time on the egg tray.  Furthermore, you can cook these eggs hard, medium or soft.  However, this electric egg cooker can also whip up some omelets or poached eggs.

The Elite Platinum EGC-207 Maxi-Matic Egg Cooker is easy to use.  Simply fill the measuring cup to the desired amount of water allocated for the desired cooked eggs.  This measuring cup is labeled to get the exact measurement for hard, medium or soft eggs.  Then, pour the water on the bottom of the egg cooker and place the egg tray on top.  You will then want to pierce the eggs with the egg piercer.  You will find the piercer attached to one end of the measuring cup.  Place the eggs on the tray, pierced-side up and cover with the lid.  Turn the button on and the red cooking light will turn on.  Once the eggs are done, the cooking light will turn off and you will hear a small click.  This is to signify the eggs are ready.

So, it’s really as simple as this.  Just make sure that once the eggs are done, you run the eggs under cold water.  This will prevent the eggs from further cooking.  And, this will also make the eggs easier to handle and easier to peel.

The Elite Platinum EGC-207 is made of stainless steel and features a see-through plastic cover so you can view the eggs while they’re cooking.  In addition, this electric egg cooker comes with a tray where you can poach or scramble the eggs.

Lastly, we love the design of this electric egg cooker.  So much so, that we just leave it on the counter.  And, we think it adds to the kitchen and the aesthetic instead of taking away.  Furthermore, and to really indulge with your aesthetic, this electric egg cooker comes in your choice of colors:   Black, Black/Stainless Steel, Green, Red, Teal and White.

Pros:

Every morning, without fail, we get perfectly cooked, soft-boiled eggs.  And, it’s a been a few months and no mishaps and no real big issues.  Just consistent deliciousness every time.

Cons:

The cooking light is not that bright.  Therefore, sometimes it’s hard to tell when the eggs are ready.  Furthermore, there’s a small, subtle click that happens when the cooking light shuts off.  You can hear this click if you’re by the egg cooker.  However, it’s difficult to hear once you step away.

Therefore, if you need an egg cooker that gives you an audible alert, we suggest going with another pick.  And, this is also to stay on the safe side.  There are a few times we lost track of time and overcooked our eggs.  As a result, this is the one feature we are quite disappointed about.

Cuisinart CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker

Cuisinart CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker

If you’re looking to feed a large family, this pick for best electric egg cookers is one of the larger ones on the market.

The Cuisinart CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker will handle up to 10 eggs and will cook them hard, medium or soft.  In addition, this electric egg cooker can cook a 3 egg omelette or poach 4 eggs at once.

This electric egg cooker is another pick that’s easy to use.  Simply measure the water in the 180 millilitre measuring cup, pour the water into the bottom of the egg cooker and place the egg tray on top.  Pierce the eggs on one end and place on the tray, pierced side up.

Next, place the lid on top and flick the switch to on.  Once the eggs are finished cooking, you will hear an audible beep and the egg cooker automatically shuts off.  Just don’t forget to immediately run the eggs under cold water so they will stop cooking.

The Cuisinart CEC-10 Egg Central Egg Cooker is made of brushed stainless steel and comes with a BPA free egg tray, poaching tray and omelet tray.

Finally, this pick for best electric egg cookers comes with a built-in cord so it can easily be stored.

Pros:

This is the best pick for those looking to feed a large family.  It is very similar to the one we chose, just on a larger scale.

In addition, this electric egg cooker makes delicious eggs morning after morning.  Therefore, it’s consistent and reliable.

Lastly, it has an unmistakable beep when the eggs are finished cooking.

Cons:

I know we said this egg cooker has an automatic shutoff.  However, that is partially true.  It actually has stand-by mode where it will stop cooking the eggs.  But, you will need to flick the switch to off in order to shut completely shut down the egg cooker.

Furthermore, the inside parts are all plastic, including the egg tray.  And, while it’s somewhat of a relief the plastic parts are BPA free, it’s still plastic.

KRUPS F23070 Egg Cooker with Water Level Indicator

KRUPS F23070 Egg Cooker with Water Level Indicator

This next pick on our list of best electric egg cookers is about as high-end as you can get.  The KRUPS F23070 Egg Cooker comes from a company who has produced quality products for more than 150 years.

This electric egg cooker can cook up to 7 eggs at a time.  And you can cook these eggs from soft-boiled to hard-boiled and anywhere in between.

Furthermore, this electric egg cooker comes with 2 poaching trays so can make poached eggs, scrambled eggs or omelets.

Using this electric egg cooker is easy.  First, you measure the water according to how you want your eggs done.  Pour the water in the base of the egg cooker and place the egg tray on top.

Next, pierce the eggs with the egg piercer which you will find on one end of the measuring cup.  Place the eggs, pierced side up, on the egg tray and cover with the lid.  Turn the dial to the right and the eggs will start cooking.  Once finished, you will hear an audible tone to let you know the eggs are ready.  If you want the eggs to sit, you can turn the dial far left and this will allow the eggs to keep warm.  And, this is great if you’re using the poaching trays.  If you are cooking the eggs on the egg tray, we suggest running them under cold water as soon as they are finished cooking.

The KRUPS F23070 Egg Cooker is made with a metal base and comes with a BPA free plastic egg tray, 2 poaching trays, a plastic lid and measuring cup.

Pros:

KRUPS have always produced consistent, quality products.  And, this electric egg cooker is no different.  So, if you’re looking for an electric egg cooker to last you a long time, this is a well-made product.

Cons:

We can’t, for the life of us, understand why they felt the need to include plastic parts.  However, it seems with even high-end products, plastic has sadly taken over.

Dash Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker

Dash Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker

If you like the double-decker style of egg cooker and you want to watch your eggs cook, this is a great alternative to the Cuisinart.  In addition, this is a 12 egg capacity egg cooker, so if you’re looking to cook a lot of eggs at once, this is a great pick to consider.

The Dash Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker will boil hard, medium or soft eggs.  And, it will also make poached, scrambled eggs or omelets.

This electric egg cooker works much like the ones above.  It comes with a measuring cup where you can measure the water for your desired style of eggs.  Once measured, pour the water into the base of the egg cooker and pierce the eggs with the piercer located at one end of the measuring cup.  Place the eggs on the egg tray, place the lid on top and press the cook button.

Once the eggs are finished, you will hear an audible buzz and the egg cooker will automatically shut off.  And, to prevent overcooking, be sure to run the eggs under cold water immediately after the cooking session is over.

The Dash Deluxe Rapid Egg Cooker is made of metal and comes with a BPA free plastic egg tray, large omelet tray and lid.

Finally, this pick on our list of best electric egg cookers comes in your choice of colors.  Choose between Black or Red.

Pros:

If you’re looking for the best electric egg cooker with a large egg capacity, this is a great option.  And, it cooks eggs consistently every time.

Cons:

Ok, the buzzer is a little annoying.  Or, maybe it’s really annoying.  This all depends on your tolerance level.  But, at least it has a buzzer, right?

In addition, the company recommends cooking no less than 6 eggs.  And, if you cook less than 6 eggs, they may not turn out how you want them to.

SimpleTaste Electric Egg Cooker

SimpleTaste Electric Egg Cooker

If you’re really on a budget, this is the least expensive on our list of best electric egg cookers.

The SimpleTaste Electric Egg Cooker will cook up to 7 eggs at a time.  And, it will prepare poached eggs or an omelete.

This electric egg cooker features a stainless steel cooking plate, a BPA free egg tray and a BPA free poaching tray.  However, the lid does contain small traces of BPA.

The SimpleTaste Electric Egg Cooker is easy to use.  Use the plastic measuring cup to measure the precise amount of water for soft, medium or hard-boiled eggs.  Pour the water into the cooking base, puncture one end of the egg with the piercer and place the egg on the egg tray.  Then, cover with the lid and push the on button.  You will see a red light when the eggs start cooking.  Once the eggs are done, the red light goes dim and the egg cooker shuts off automatically.

Finally, this electric egg cooker comes with a clear top so you can keep an eye on the prize.  And, this is especially convenient when poaching eggs or making an omelete.

Pros:

This pick on our list of best electric egg cookers is a good bang for your buck.  It’s simple in design, easy to use and consistently produces great results.

Cons:

The lid has traces of BPA.  Personally, for us, this is a deal breaker.  And, this model is very similar to the one we chose, minus the BPA.  So, if you are on a serious budget, for a few more dollars you can choose the one without BPA.  And, you can find this pick at the top of our list.

In addition, this doesn’t have an audible sound to alert you when your eggs are done cooking.  Therefore, it’s you who’s going to have to be on alert.

Best Fruit Fly Trap

Best Fruit Fly Trap 2018

When we received the assignment to find the best fruit fly trap, we couldn’t have had a better opportunity to share our own experience while writing this article.

And, this is because we had a fruit fly infestation.  While our infestation may have been different from yours, it is still crucial to cross your T’s and dot your I’s when it comes to ridding your home of these annoying pests.

How to Get Rid of Fruit Flies

So, when we had a fruit fly infestation, we set out homemade traps.  These traps were made of an apple cider vinegar and dish soap concoction.  And, because we used clear glass jars, these traps were unsightly, to say the least.  Furthermore, we thought the more traps we set out, the higher probability we would get rid of the fruit flies.

Therefore, with an apartment full of fruit fly traps, company was limited.  Or, if company did visit, they were bombarded with apologies.

And, while these fruit fly traps managed to trap hundreds of fruit flies, it was an ongoing issue where we were left with no alternative.

So, begrudgingly, we side-eyed our beautiful plant in the corner of our apartment.  Oh, but it can’t be that gorgeous plant we purchased upon move-in.  There’s no way.

Best Fruit Fly Trap

And so, we waited.  And we waited.  Until we couldn’t handle an apartment full of homemade fruit fly traps anymore, let alone the fruit flies.  So, we took the plant and had a burial in the dumpster.

Now, I’m not sure that this plant couldn’t be saved.  However, we were at our wits end.  It’s either us or the plant.  Therefore, the plant had to go.

So, why are we telling you this story?  Well, in case the easiest means to an end is just ridding of the plants.  Then you don’t have to deal with fruit fly traps that won’t work anyway because the source of the fruit flies is still in your home.

Therefore, before you purchase a fruit fly trap, try to rid the source first.  And, sources can vary.  According to The Bug Squad, the kitchen is the first place to investigate.  But, other places like the toilet, and like we mentioned, plants, need your private eye.

However, there can be other scenarios other than having an infestation.  If you don’t have a nest hiding somewhere and it’s just an environmental factor, then you’re a great candidate for these top 6 best fruit fly traps.

Or, if you have done everything possible to find the source to no avail, and you need some traps, you’re another great candidate.

So, without further ado, we know you want to get rid of the flies yesterday, so we’ll let you browse through to find the best fruit fly for your situation.  These picks for best fruit fly traps are not a one-sizes-fits-all solution.  Each one has its own individualistic way of trapping these buggers and it’s up to you to pick the right one for your household.

 

Best Fruit Fly Trap

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
KATCHY Electric Insect Trap
KATCHY
Electric Insect Trap
UV Light
Glue Boards
Chemical-Free
Pesticide-Free
Built-In Fan
Electrical/USB
5.4" x 5.4" x 9"
Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap
Trapro
WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap
UV Light
Reflective Coating
Glue Boards
Chemical-Free
Pesticide-Free
Electrical
6-Foot Cord
13" x 5.5" x 7.5"
FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap
FlyFix
Fruit Fly Trap
Scent Vents
Funnel
Reusable
Color Options
3.5" x 3.5" x 3.5"
Gardner Fly Web Fly Trap
Gardner
Fly Web Fly Trap
UV Light
Glue Card
Chemical-Free
Pesticide-Free
Electrical
14.4" x 5.9" x 2"
Safer Brand 5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap
Safer Brand
5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap
Stakes
Sticky Traps
Chemical-Free
Pesticide-Free
Adjustable
Disposable
7.4" x 5.5" x 0.7"
Terro 2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap
Terro
2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap
Food-Based Liquid Lure
Vapor Chamber
Reusable
2.1" x 5.4" x 6.4"

 

Best Fruit Fly Trap

KATCHY Electric Insect Trap

KATCHY Electric Insect Trap

Our first pick for best fruit fly trap will attract fruit flies in areas of up to 320 square feet.  The KATCHY Electric Insect Trap uses UV light to lure in flies, insects and bugs.  Once these buggers are lured in, they are trapped by a glue-board which is located inside the catcher.

Furthermore, since this fruit fly trap uses an ultraviolet fluorescent bulb to attract the flies, you don’t have to deal with pesticides or insecticides.  In addition, because it doesn’t use these chemicals, this trap is odorless.

The KATCHY Electric Insect Trap comes with 4 replaceable glue boards.  And, if you need additional glue boards, you can find them here.

This fruit fly trap uses a built-in fan to suck the flies and insects into the trap.  Once they’re inside the trap, they are attached to the glue boards.

However, you’re also able to use this trap without the glue boards.  But, this is best for larger flies and insects.  Smaller flies and insects, such as fruit flies, have a better chance of escaping.  So, it is recommended you use glue boards for fruit flies.

The KATCHY Electric Insect Trap can be used in an electrical outlet or a USB port.  This means, you can use this trap without electricity, as long as you have a battery with a USB port attached.  This can be as simple as plugging it in to your computer or using a portable battery charger.

Lastly, this fruit fly trap is ultra quiet.  So, there’s no annoying zapping sound and no loud fan to deal with.

Pros:

The KATCHY Electric Insect Trap has a unobstrusive design.  Therefore, it doesn’t scream “I have flies!”  So, when company comes over, no one is going to know you’re hunting for insects.

In addition, this fruit fly trap works extremely well.  And, it works with or without electricity, which is great for using it at home or in the sticks.

Cons:

This fruit fly trap works best in the dark.  So, it may give you peace of mind during the evening hours, but the day light hours may be somewhat of a nightmare.

It is important to note, though, this pick for best fruit fly trap has high ratings for catching fruit flies amongst consumers.

Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap

Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap

This next pick for best fruit fly trap can cover an area of up to 900 square feet.  So, if you have a larger space to deal with, this is a fruit fly trap to consider.

 The Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap uses UV light to attract flies, insects and other bugs.  In addition, this UV light features an inner reflective coating which further attracts the fruit flies to their demise.  This will also help to trap flies equally as well in the daytime as it does in the nighttime.

This fruit fly trap is non-toxic and pesticide free.  Furthermore, since it uses UV light to trap flies and insects, it is odorless.

The Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap uses glue boards so the flies and insects have no chance of escaping.  And, it comes with 6 glue boards in total.  If you need additional glue boards, you can find the replacements here.

Finally, this pick for best fruit fly trap is designed to mount on the wall.  It is recommended you mount the trap approximately 6 feet above the floor.  And, since it has a 6 foot cord, it is best to mount it approximately 5 feet away from the nearest outlet.

Pros:

This pick is fantastic for those who are working with a larger space.

Furthermore, most fruit fly traps that use UV light usually work best when it’s dark.  However, since this fruit fly trap features reflective coating along with the UV light, you can breathe a sigh of relief during the daytime.

Cons:

Their older model had a better design, and we think with this model, they went a step backwards.  But, with this current design, it is meant to blend in with the surroundings, especially if you’re working with white walls.

FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap

FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap

If you’re looking to trap the sporadic fruit fly, this is a pick to consider.  However, if you have a larger, ongoing problem, we suggest going with another one of our picks.

The FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap lures the fruit flies with your choice of attractant.  And, we recommend going with a non-toxic pick to keep things safe around the home.  Our favorite natural, non-toxic attractant is the Eco Defense Fruit Fly Lure which you can find here.  However, you can also whip up some homemade fruit fly lure by using apple cider vinegar and a couple of drops of dishwashing soap.

The fruit flies are lured by way of the scent vents.  Then, they enter through a funnel which prevents their escape.  And, once in the funnel, they make their way down to the base which obscures their view.  So, there’s no chasing the guests from the house or ruining anyone’s appetite.

The FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap is reusable.  Once the bottom base is ready to empty, just twist the water icon and fill with water.  Then, twist it again to unlock and clean.  And, to reuse this fruit fly trap, it’s as easy as adding the lure and re-attaching the two parts.

Finally, with this pick for best fruit fly trap, you get your choice of color combinations.  Choose between Blue/White, Green/White, Red/Gray or Yellow/White.

Pros:

The FlyFix Fruit Fly Trap does a great job at catching and trapping fruit flies.  In addition, it does just as well at concealing them.

Furthermore, this is a great budget solution before deciding if you should spend money on a more expensive device.

Cons:

Some consumers have issues with the fruit flies escaping.  However, because this is a budget option, it makes it easier to fork over the money to see if it will work your situation.

In addition, with this fruit fly trap, you will need to provide your own attractant.  While this isn’t the biggest deal in the world, sometimes it’s easier to go with just replacing a glue board than making sure you have a concoction on hand.

Gardner Fly Web Fly Trap

Gardner Fly Web Fly Trap

If you’re working with a smaller space, this compact fruit fly trap is one to check out.

The Gardner Fly Web Fly Trap attracts fruit flies by way of the UV light.  And, once these flies are lured in, they are trapped on the FlyWeb adhesive glue card.  However, this fruit fly trap only comes with 1 glue card so we highly recommend ordering replacements upon purchase.  You can find those replacements here.

And, like we mentioned, this fruit fly trap uses a UV light. Once this light goes out, you are also able to replace it.  You can find the replacement light here

The Gardner Fly Web Fly Trap attaches to a standard household outlet.  And, once plugged in, it automatically turns on.  Furthermore, this pick for best fruit fly trap looks like a night-light, therefore, it’s unobtrusive.

Finally, because this uses UV lighting, this fruit fly trap works best during the nighttime hours.

Pros:

This pick for best fruit fly trap is unobtrusive.  In addition, it will not only look like a night-light, it will double as a night-light.

Furthermore, many consumers have had real success with this pick.

Cons:

Like we mentioned above, it is intended to work in the dark.  So, if you want a UV light fruit fly trap that works 24 hours, we suggest going with the Trapro WS108 Wall Sconce Fly Light Trap.

 

Safer Brand 5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap

Safer Brand 5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap

If you have an issue with fruit flies invading your plants, this pick for best fruit fly trap may work for you.  The Safer Brand 5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap features a stake which can easily be inserted into soil.  Furthermore, these stakes are adjustable, so matter what type of pot you’re working with, they will fit most sizes.

This fruit fly trap uses natural pest control which is chemical-free and pesticide-free.  And, it uses the color yellow and glue to attract and trap the fruit flies.

With the Safer Brand 5025 Houseplant Sticky Stakes Insect Trap, you will receive a total of 14 stakes and 14 traps.  Once the traps are filled up, you just wrap them in paper and throw them away.

Pros:

This is a great way to prevent your plants from being infested with fruit flies.  In addition, if your plants do have fruit flies, this a great way to rid of the fruit flies.

Cons:

These stakes are reusable, however, for the life of us, we can’t find the replacement traps in order to reuse the stakes.  Therefore, since these are relatively inexpensive, it’s not that big of a deal.

Terro 2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap

Terro 2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap

Our final pick for best fruit fly trap works well on the kitchen counter.  The Terro 2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap will completely hide the trapped flies while looking as if it is just a kitchen ornament.

This fruit fly trap uses a non-toxic, food-based liquid to lure the flies into the trap.  Once the flies enter the trap, there is no escape.

The Terro 2-Pack Fruit Fly Trap is easy to use.  Simply pull the lid off of the base to expose the vapor chamber.  Then, place it near the source of the problem or in a high-traffic, fruit fly infested area.

Finally, this trap is reusable.  Once the trap is full, unscrew the top, empty the contents and clean.  Then, just add apple cider vinegar, a couple of drops of dish soap and screw the 2 pieces back together.

Pros:

This is another pick that is unobtrusive.  So much so, you can be eating next to it and have no idea that it’s a fruit fly demise.  Therefore, this is a perfect option if you tend to have a lot of company.

Furthermore, they are small in size so they won’t take up much space.

Cons:

While this is one of the most highly reviewed fruit fly traps on the market, there were a concerning amount of consumers whom this didn’t work for.  So, you have to wonder, is it the product or did they have different types of insects as opposed to fruit flies?

Best Steam Mop 2018

5 Best Steam Mops for 2018

If you’re looking for the best steam mop, you’ve come to the right place.  And, this is because we searched and reviewed the top steam mops on the market and narrowed our findings down to the top 5 best steam mops money can buy.

However, before we started this process, we wanted to know what makes a steam mop so much different from a regular mop?  The answers we received changed the way we mop floors.

Steam Mop Benefits

First of all, we err on the side of being health-conscious and the less chemicals we use the better.  And, with a steam mop, there is no need for chemicals.  Instead of chemicals, a steam mop uses hot steam to kill germs and remove stains.  Ok…this blew us out of the water.  You mean to tell us that you can kill germs and rid stains without chemicals?  So, with this new-found knowledge, we discovered our new favorite product.

Best Steam Mop 2018

Some of the other steam mop benefits are, with a steam mop, the floors will dry quicker.  And, there is no need to scrub the floors when using a steam mop because the steam is strong enough to remove ground-in dirt and tough stains all on its own.  Furthermore, there are steam mops where you can clean the countertops and bathroom tiles.  And, the steam mop works great on tiles as it will clean the hard-to-reach grout.

So, now that we have the benefits out of the way, what’s going to be the best steam mop for you?

First, you may want to visualize the space you will be mopping.  Does it have a lot of corners and hard to reach areas?  If this is the case, you may want to search for a particular design that is best suited for the space you are working with.  And, perhaps a steam mop shaped as a triangle will be the best solution for you.  Or, you may work best with a steam mop that has a detachable head where you can easily reach into tight spaces.  So, when reviewing our picks for best steam mop, keep your space in mind.

The other thing to ask yourself when choosing the best steam mop is, what size of space are you working with?  And, this is because these tanks vary with the amount of water they can hold.  So, the last thing you want to do is refill the water when you’re almost done with the chore.  So, be sure to choose a tank size according to your space size.

Best Steam Mop for Hardwoods, Tile and Laminate Floors

One concern some consumers have when choosing the best steam mop is the type of floor they’re working with.  And, some people go on the hunt for the best steam mop for hardwoods or the best steam mop for tile.  However, with our final picks, these steam mops treat all sealed, hard-surfaced floors with the ultimate respect.

In addition, this is a huge bonus for those of us who have multiple types of flooring in our households.  So, if you want to steam mop the hardwoods, you can then go right to the bathroom tile with the same mop.

If you’re looking to use a steam mop on carpets, we do have a couple of picks that come with carpet gliders which will enable you to do just that.  Therefore, you can go from the kitchen to the bathroom and right to the carpet with the same machine.

So, now you should have an idea of what you’re looking for.  And, the next step is to review the top 5 best steam mops on the market and find your perfect fit.

 

Best Steam Mop 2018

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Shark Steam Mop S1000A
Shark
Steam Mop S1000A
Swivel Mop Head
2 Mop Pads
Removable Water Tank
30 Second Heating Time
18 Ft Cord
Locks Upright
11" x 7.4" x 46.1"
Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop
Shark
Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop
Swivel Mop Head
2 Mop Pads
Removable Water Tank
Adjustable Steam Levels
Handheld Steamer
Steam Blaster
20 Second Heating Time
18 Ft Cord
12" x 12" x 51.2"
Light N Easy Steam Mop
Light N Easy
Steam Mop
Swivel Mop Head
Carpet Gliders
1 Mop Pad
Removable Water Tank
Adjustable Steam Levels
Handheld Steamer
Flexible Hose
20 Second Heating Time
20 Ft Cord
Locks Upright
11.8" x 6.8" x 46.4"
O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop
O-Cedar
Microfiber Steam Mop
Triangle Mop Head
Swivel Mop Head
Carpet Gliders
2 Mop Pads
20 Second Heating Time
18 Ft Cord
Locks Upright
10" x 6" x 27"
Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop
Bissell
PowerFresh Steam Mop
Swivel Mop Head
Built-In Easy Scrubber
1 Mop Pad
1 Scrub Mop Pad
Fragrance Discs
Removable Water Tank
Adjustable Steam Levels
30 Second Heating Time
23 Ft Cord
Color Options
11.6" x 7.1" x 28.6"

 

Best Steam Mop 2018

Shark Steam Mop S1000A

Shark Steam Mop S1000A

Shark produces some of the most beloved steam mops on the market, so it’s no surprise we have 2 shark steam mops on our list.  And, topping our list is this lightweight Shark Steam Mop S1000A.

This pick for best steam mop is perfect for those who are looking for hassle-free cleaning.  This steam mop is simple and there’s no frills about it.  So, if you’re someone who’s looking for a steam mop for everyday type of household chores, this is one to consider.

The Shark Steam Mop S1000A is just plug-and-go.  Once this steam mop is plugged in, the steam reaches its heat level within 30 second and the steam is released by movement of the mop.  Therefore, there’s no On/Off button to finagle with.

Once you get the mop moving, the 12 inch mop head maneuvers in a swivel fashion to reach the corners and other angled areas.  And, with an 18 foot cord, you’re more than likely able to steam mop a large-sized room without having to switch outlets.

The Shark Steam Mop S1000A features an extra-large tank which means less refills.  Furthermore, this tank is easily removable and fill-able.

This steam mop comes with 2 mop pads which are machine washable.  And, it is recommended you replace each pad after approximately 3 months of use.  You can find the top replacement pads for this particular model here.

Finally, once the deed is done, the Shark Steam Mop S1000A is easy to store.  It features a compact size and conveniently locks upright.

Pros:

No hassle, no frills and floors that are spick n’ span.  This pretty much sums up the best features of this mop.  And, like we mentioned above, this is an excellent choice for everyday household cleaning.

Furthermore, this steam mop heats up in 30 seconds, so when we say it’s just plug-and-go, it’s literally plug-and-go.

Cons:

Some consumers need some frills.  And, with this steam mop, there isn’t any.  So, if you’re looking for a detachable head to clean bathroom tile or need more angle to your mop head, you may want to consider some of the other steam mops on our list.

In addition, the mop pad is not intended to pick up dirt.  Therefore, you want to make sure your floors are clear of dust and loose dirt before using.

Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop

Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop

Our second pick for best steam mop is another great Shark option.  However, unlike the other Shark steam mop on our list, this is for consumers who are tackling a lot more than just your normal, everyday household cleaning.

The Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop is able to dust while mopping and scrubbing.  And, this is all thanks to the dual-sided dirt grip pads.  These grip pads are machine washable, reusable and replaceable.  Furthermore, when detaching the grip pad from the mop, there is no need to touch the pad.  Simply press the button and the pad comes off on its own.

This steam mop offers a 2-n-1 solution.  It works as a steam mop and it converts to a handheld steamer for hard to reach areas or above-the-floor cleaning.  And, this cleaning may include the bathroom walls, kitchen countertops, curtains, ceiling fans, baseboards…you name it. 

The Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop is easy to use.  Simply set the desired level of steam:  Standby, Low or Hot.  And, within seconds, the steam is heated to the desired temperature and you can mop away.  Furthermore, if you’re looking to clean tougher stains, this steam mop features a steam blaster where you can add additional steam to get the job done.

This steam mop has a 220 millilitre tank which converts to roughly 1 cup.  And, it offers an 18 foot cord which will allow you to steam mop most large rooms without the need to switch outlets.

Pros:

We can’t rave enough about the portable attachment this steam mop comes with.  And not only does it work great for above-floor cleaning, you can also steam clean your clothes with it.  The possibilities are endless.

Furthermore, the Shark Lift-Away Pro Steam Pocket Mop offers a steam blaster which tackles the toughest of stains effortlessly.

Lastly, this steam mop comes with a triangle-shaped mop head which can clean hard to reach nooks and crannies. 

Cons:

This pick for best steam mop is not able to stand on its own.  And, it has trouble leaning against a counter.  Therefore, you may find yourself laying it on the ground between intervals.

In addition, when using the handheld steamer, you will need to hold the button down to produce continuous steam.  And, for large projects, this can get tiring.

 

Light N Easy Steam Mop

 

Light N Easy Steam Mop

Shark steam mops tend to take all the glory, however, this particular brand is another beloved steam mop amongst consumers.  And, with all the cleaning this steam mop can conquer, it easy to see why.

The Light N Easy Steam Mop is a 5-n-1 mop, and is able to clean floors, carpet, clothes, windows, glass…just to name a few.  And, of course, it’s also able to steam clean all sealed, hard-surfaced floors.

This steam mop has 3 steam modes that control the level of steam produced.  You can choose between Low, Medium and High.  Once the mop is in the upright, locked position, the mop will go into idle mode and no steam will be produced.

Furthermore, once you set your level of steam, within seconds, the steam will start producing and you just start mopping.  It’s as easy as that.  And, the Light N Easy Steam Mop will swivel to ensure corners and crevices are clean.  

This steam mop comes with a built-in, handheld steam cleaner which is great for steaming clothes and curtains.  In addition, it also comes with a flexible hose for hard-to-reach areas.

The Light N Easy Steam Mop features a 340 millilitre tank which will run for about 20 to 25 minutes on the lowest steam setting.  And, this steam mop comes with a 20 foot cord so you should be able to steam mop most large rooms without the need to switch outlets.

Finally, you will receive one mop head along with your purchase.  This mop head is machine washable, reusable and replaceable. 

Pros:

This pick for best steam mop is lightweight, sturdy and well-built.

Furthermore, the Light N Easy Steam Mop is able to clean just about everything.  Now, we caution ourselves when saying that but with the handheld steam cleaner and flexible hose, it’s not too far off from the truth.

Cons:

This steam mop only comes with one mop head.  So, if you’re in the middle of a job and need to replace the mop head before finishing, you may have to wait for the washing machine first.  However, if you purchase additional mop heads when ordering this steam mop, this problem is solved.

Some consumers state that this steam mop doesn’t produce the amount of steam it takes to deal with tough stains or ground-in dirt.  So, this may be a pick that is more for everyday-type of household cleaning.

 

O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop

O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop

This next pick for best steam mop is designed to reach just about every nook and cranny.  The O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop features a triangle mop head which easily maneuvers around furniture and reaches into those hard to clean corners.

This steam mop comes with a continuous dial where you can adjust your level of steam.  Once the steam level is set, it will start steaming in approximately 20 seconds.  And, when you’re ready to mop, just start mopping.  There is no button to hold, therefore, no cramping hands.

The O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop comes with a snap-on carpet glider.  This carpet glider will allow you to steam clean your carpets easily and swiftly.

This steam mop comes with 2 removable, machine washable and replaceable mop heads.  These mop heads are made of microfiber which is ultra gentle on floors, especially wood floors.

In addition, this steam mop comes with an 18 foot cord which should allow you to mop a large room without the hassle of switching outlets.

Finally, the O-Cedar Microfiber Steam Mop comes with a plastic cup to fill the 200 millilitre tank since the tank is not detachable.  And, when it’s time to dump the water from the tank, just hold the steam mop upside down over the sink and the water will run out.

Pros:

We really like the angled head on this steam mop as it easily maneuvers around furniture.  Furthermore, the mop heads are made of microfiber, which, in our opinion, is the best material to mop hard wood floors with.

In addition, this steam mop comes with carpet gliders so you can go from mopping the kitchen floors to steaming the area rug.

Cons:

The angled head has rounded corners.  And, while this is great for mopping without damaging the walls and furniture, it doesn’t quite get into the corners as much as we would like.

Furthermore, the tank is not removable.  While this isn’t the biggest hassle, we just don’t care for the whole process of flipping the mop upside down over the sink.

 

Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop

Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop

This steam mop has thousands of positive reviews.  And, it’s most notable for how well it cleans and how easy it is to use.

The Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop features a built-in easy scrubber.  This built-in easy scrubber flips down to assist in tackling the most difficult of jobs.  Therefore, not only can this mop steam your floors, it can also scrub them.  Furthermore, this built-in easy scrubber is designed to reach into crevices such as grout.

In addition to the built-in easy scrubber, this steam mop comes with a microfiber mop pad and a mop pad with scrubbing strips.  These mop pads are reusable, machine washable and replaceable.

This steam mop comes with adjustable steam levels ranging from low to hot.  And, once you have your steam level set, this steam mop is ready within 30 seconds.

The Bissell PowerFresh Steam Mop comes with a 23 inch cord which is the longest cord on our list of best steam mops.  And, with a 23 inch cord, you should easily be able to mop a large-sized room and then some.

This steam mop features a removable water tank and this water tank is relatively large with a 12 ounce capacity.

Finally, and this is a fun note to end on, this steam mop comes in your choice of colors.  Choose between Blue, Orange and Purple Pet.  Furthermore, this mop also comes with Spring Breeze fragrance discs.  And, although these discs are optional, some consumers like to have that clean, fresh feeling.

Pros:

With this steam mop, consumers love how hot the steam gets.  So, if you’re looking for extra hot steam, this is definitely a steam mop to consider.

Furthermore, this steam mop cleans grout extraordinarily well.  And, this is partly due to the hot steam and partly due to the built-in easy scrubber.

Cons:

Because the steam gets ultra hot, it is recommended you wear shoes or socks when operating this steam mop.  In addition, make sure the little ones are safe as well.

And, another steam warning, be ultra careful when pressing your foot down on the scrubber.

Best Popcorn Popper

Best Popcorn Popper – Microwave, Stovetop, Electric and Air

Choosing the best popcorn popper is no easy chore.  There are all types of different poppers on the market.  Some are electric, some are microwavable, some are stove top and some look as if they come straight from the circus.  Therefore, we chose the top rated popcorn poppers in each category. 

So, what did we look for when we searched for the best popcorn popper?  Well, reliability is a must.  When we want popcorn, we want it now.  And, there’s no room in our cupboards for a broken down popcorn machine.

Best Popcorn Popper

The next aspect we look for in the best popcorn popper is convenience.  Popcorn, for us, is one of those things we don’t want to spend a lot of time on.  Usually, when we decide to have popcorn, it’s a split-second decision right before we snuggle up to watch a movie.  Therefore, quick and convenient popcorn also topped our list.

So, after narrowing down the most reliable, quickest and most convenient popcorn poppers, we sifted through hundreds of user reviews and we found the top 6 best popcorn poppers on the market.  And now all you have to do is choose which one is right for you.

But, which type of popcorn popper is best for you?  Like we stated earlier, we have chosen the best Air, Microwave, Electric and Stove Top poppers and there’s a stark difference between all of them.  So, if you’re undecided which one to go with, at the end of this post you will find a “Popcorn Popper Buying Guide” which will take you through the ins-and-outs of each type of popper.

However, If you know what you want, check out are top picks for best popcorn popper below.

 

Best Popcorn Popper

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker
Excelvan
Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker
Plastic
Stainless Steel
BPA Free
Melamine Free
2-n-1 Bowl
Collapsible
Color Options
10.8" x 10.8" x 11.8"
Aicok Popcorn Maker
Aicok
Popcorn Maker
Plastic
BPA Free
Dishwasher Safe
7.1" x 5.1" x 10.9"
HOTPOP The Original Microwave Popcorn Popper
HOTPOP
The Original Microwave Popcorn Popper
Silicone
BPA Free
PVC Free
2-n-1 Bowl
Cool Touch Handles
Color Options
8" x 8" x 2.2"
West Bend Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper Machine
West Bend
Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper Machine
Plastic
Metal
Non Stick
BPA Free
2-n-1 Bowl
Cool Touch Handles
Built-In Butter Well
Heat Resistant Base
Dishwasher Safe
10" x 10" x 13"
Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper
Great Northern Popcorn Company
Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper
Stainless Steel
Wood
17" x 10" x 8"

 

Best Air Popcorn Popper

Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker

Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker

Our first pick for best air popcorn popper offers a 2-n-1 solution.  The Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker starts off as an air popper and converts to a popcorn bowl.  So, once you finish popping the corn, the bowl detaches from the popper and you can just snack on the popcorn from there.

The Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker is made of plastic with a stainless steel liner.  And, these materials are 100% BPA and melamine free.  Therefore, this popcorn popper doesn’t include all the toxins you find in a lot of other plastic products.

This air popper will pop the popcorn quickly and easily.  Simply feed the corn into the popper and it pops right into the bowl.  In addition, because this is an air popper, the Excelvan Air-Pop Popcorn Maker doesn’t require oil in order to pop.  This makes this pick for best popcorn maker one of the healthiest on our list.

Once you’re finished popping one batch of popcorn, it is recommended to let the air popper sit for 15 minutes before popping another batch.  And, this is to ensure the popper doesn’t overheat.

The Excelvan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker collapses into 4 separate parts.  This makes this air popper easy to clean and easy to store.  However, this air popper is not dishwasher safe so you will have to clean it by hand.

Lastly, this air popper comes in your choice of 2 colors:  Orange and White.

Pros:

We like this pick for best popcorn maker because it is made with 100% BPA and melamine-free materials.  In addition, the inner liner is constructed of stainless steel which is a very safe metal to cook with.

Furthermore, the Excelevan Homemade Air-Pop Popcorn Maker makes fantastic popcorn and it has a bowl you can pop with and eat out of.

Cons:

With this popper, you can only use it in 15 minute intervals.  So, if you’re feeding a large group of people, this may not be your most time efficient choice.

In addition, this popper is not dishwasher safe so you will be cleaning it by hand.  The good news is, it does break down into 4 different pieces, making it rather easy to clean by hand.

Aicok Popcorn Maker

Aicok Popcorn Maker

This next pick for best air popcorn popper is ultra fast.  The Aicok Popcorn Maker is ready within minutes and has a popping rate of a whopping 98%.  So, for every 100 kernels, 98 of them turn into popcorn.

This air popcorn popper is FDA approved and BPA free.  Therefore, you will be popping with non toxic plastic for an even healthier bowl of popcorn.

The Aicok Popcorn Maker is easy to use.  Simply use the included measuring spoon to fill the popcorn maker with corn.  Close the cover and turn on the machine.  And, within 2 minutes, you have a bowl of popcorn ready to go.

This pick for best popcorn popper is not machine washable.  However, the base of this popcorn machine can be wiped down and the top cover and measuring cup can be hand washed.

Pros:

This is another pick which is BPA free.  So, this will make an even healthier bowl of popcorn.  

Furthermore, for the price, this is one quick machine.

Cons:

The Aicok Popcorn Popper can only pop so much popcorn at a time.  And, in between sessions, you need to wait 10-12 minutes to let the machine cool down.  So, this is a great pick for a small-sized family.  A large family, not so much.

 

Best Microwave Popcorn Popper

HOTPOP The Original Microwave Popcorn Popper

HOTPOP The Original Microwave Popcorn Popper

Our pick for best microwave popcorn popper can pop up to 15 cups of popcorn within 4 minutes.  Therefore, if you’re feeding a large family, this pick is extremely time efficient.

The HOTPOP Original Microwave Popcorn Popper is BPA free and PVC free.  And, it is made with 100% food grade silicone.

This microwave popcorn popper allows you to add oil or do without.  So, if you’re one of those who love to slather your kernels with oil, go for it.  If you’re on a health kick, you don’t need oil to get these kernels popping.

The HOTPOP Microwave Popcorn Popper is a 2-n-1 solution.  You can pop the kernels in the bowl and use the bowl for consuming the popcorn.  Furthermore, the bowl has cool-touch handles so you can enjoy as soon as the last kernel is done popping.

This pick for best popcorn popper is dishwasher safe.  And, once it’s clean and dry, you can collapse the bowl down to 2.4 inches tall to wedge it in the fullest of drawers.

Finally, the HOTPOP Microwave Popcorn Popper comes in your choice of 7 colors:  Aqua, Black, Blue, Clear, Green, Purple and Red.

Pros:

Like one consumer stated, “Can’t stop eating popcorn.”  And, that pretty much says it all.  However, we will elaborate.  This popcorn popper makes popcorn super quick and it’s extremely easy to use.  In addition, it’s pretty hard to burn the popcorn so expect every batch to be perfectly popped.

A few more notable features we love about this popper:  it is BPA free, PVC free, it has cool touch handles, it collapses for easy storing and it doubles up as a bowl once you’re done popping.  And, overall, we are highly impressed with this microwave popcorn popper.

Cons:

A few consumers complained that this pick for best popcorn popper didn’t pop the popcorn all the way.  However, the less kernels you use, the better your results will be.

 

Best Electric Popcorn Popper

West Bend Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper Machine

West Bend Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper Machine

For those who prefer an electric popcorn machine, the West Bend Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper Machine is the way to go.  This pick for best electric popcorn popper can pop up to 27 cups of popcorn in under 4 minutes.

This electric popcorn popper features a built-in butter well which will allow the popper to evenly coat your popcorn with butter.  However, it is important to note that with this electric popcorn popper, you don’t need butter or oil to get the job done.  Therefore, this is a healthy option when it comes to the popping world.

The West Bend Stir Crazy Electric Popcorn Popper is a 2-n-1 solution.  Once the popcorn is done popping, the top lid converts to a bowl.  And, this top lid is see-through, so you will be able to see the process unfold while you’re waiting.  Furthermore, this bowl has heat-resistant handles.  So, once the popcorn is done popping, you can dig right in.

And speaking of heat-resistance, this electric popcorn popper features a heat-resistant base to help protect your countertops from heat damage.

For cleaning purposes, this electric popcorn popper has a non-stick surface which makes cleanup a breeze.  Simply wipe down the surface and you can throw the serving bowl in the top rack of the dishwasher.

Last, but definitely not least, the serving bowl is BPA free.  

Pros:

This pick for best popcorn popper is a great solution for those looking to feed a group of people as it pops 27 cups in less than 4 minutes.  However, if you’re looking to use this for just a few cups of popcorn, this will work as well.

In addition, the built-in butter well is a great feature as it will evenly coat the popcorn to your liking.  And, the fact that you don’t have to use the butter well is another nice feature.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained this popcorn leaves a lot of condensation on the popcorn.  What happens is this air popper produces steam while popping, and once done, when flipping the popcorn popper over and removing the bowl, the steam leaves the popcorn damp.  It is important to note that most consumers didn’t have this issue.  However, it may be a case of letting the popcorn sit for a bit and allowing the steam to settle.

In addition, some consumers have had issues with the non-stick coating scraping off.  And, this is a bit concerning as you don’t want to be ingesting the non stick coating!  But, again, most consumers didn’t seem to have this issue, so it may be a default with the particular popcorn popper they received.  Our parting words, proceed with caution.

 

Best Stovetop Popcorn Popper

Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper

Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper

Our last pick for best popcorn popper is all about keeping it simple.  And, sometimes simple is better.  However, just be aware, it’s going to take a little work on your part.

The Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper is a classic popcorn machine where you will manually stir the popcorn while it’s popping.  And, while this turns some people off, for others, it can feel like you’re a part of the process.  Furthermore, it’s fantastic for toning up the arm.

This pick for best stove top popcorn popper is made of stainless steel and has a duplex heat pad to ensure even cooking.  In addition, it comes with metal gears, as well as, wood handles and knobs.

The Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper will make 20 cups of popcorn in minutes.  So, if you’re feeding a large family, this is a great solution to consider.

And, it is important to note that this popcorn popper will require oil in order to pop.  Therefore, if you’re looking to feast on “naked” popcorn, you may want to try one of the other picks on our list.

Finally, this pick for best popcorn popper is one of the easiest to clean.  It’s so easy you may forget all the work you did to stir the kernels.  Just wipe the pan down with a paper towel and it’s ready to store.

Pros:

The Great Northern Popcorn Company Original Stove Top Popcorn Popper is the real deal.  It is built with stainless steel and real wood handles.  Therefore, expect this popcorn popper to handle all the torment of popping popcorn for years to come.

Furthermore, it is a great solution for those looking to treat a lot of people as it will make up to 20 cups of popcorn in just minutes.

Cons:

This pick for best popcorn popper is not to be used on an induction stove.

In addition, some consumers state the stirring rod doesn’t reach to the bottom of the pan far enough.  Consequently, this leaves a lot of kernels yet to be popped.

 

Popcorn Popper Buying Guide

Like we mentioned above, there are stark differences between Air, Microwave, Electric and Stovetop popcorn poppers.  And, we’ve mapped out a detailed buying guide to showcase the differences between these poppers and help you make the best decision for you.

Air Popcorn Popper

Popping popcorn via the air popper has been deemed the healthiest way to consume this snack.  And, as Today suggests, it is the healthiest as long as you make “naked” air-popped popcorn.  Naked air-popped popcorn is popping just the kernels and nothing else.  However, most of us like to dress our popcorn with something.  Therefore, after air popping the popcorn, you can control how much butter and salt you dress it with.  So, with a light salty buttery seasoning, you can still be somewhat healthy with the air popcorn popper.

Using an air popcorn popper is easy.  You just feed the kernels into the popper and within a couple of minutes you’ll have a bowl full of popcorn.  And, to get a general idea of how an air popper works, our friends over at Instructables have a great guide detailing the process.

Microwave Popcorn Popper

A microwave popcorn popper is the easiest way to pop popcorn.  And, it is also the least messy.  Furthermore, with our pick for best microwave popcorn popper, it is just as healthy as using an air popcorn popper.  This is because you can pop the corn without oil and add your desired amount, if any, after the popcorn is in its edible state.

So, if you’re looking for the most hassle-free way to pop corn, we suggest going the microwave route.

Electric Popcorn Popper

With most electric popcorn poppers, you will need to use oil while the kernels are popping.  However, with the best electric popcorn popper on our list, you can pop with or without oil.

So, why would you go with an electric popcorn popper over the other options?  And, it all comes down to preference.  Furthermore, some people prefer to have their popcorn continuously stirred for them throughout the process.

Another reason why you may consider an electric popcorn popper is it will pop the most amount of popcorn in the shortest amount of time.  So, if you’re looking to treat a larger group of people, this is definitely the route to take.

To get an idea on how an electric popcorn popper works, WikiHow takes you through the steps here.

Stove Top Popcorn Popper

Popping popcorn on the stove top is Ok as long as you use stainless steel.  And, according to Non Toxic for Health, sticking with a stainless steel stove top popper is your best bet for non toxic popcorn.  Therefore, you should stay clear of aluminum poppers and those that have plastic parts.

And, with the stove top method, it’s rather quick and easy, not to mention, fun.  In addition, it is manual so you will be stirring the kernels as they’re popping.

It is important to note, though, the stove top method will require oil.  So, this is not the healthiest option on our list.

Best Bathroom Scale

Best Bathroom Scale for Accuracy

We began our search for best bathroom scale by conducting a survey.  And, the findings of the survey garnered accuracy as the top requirement for the best bathroom scale.  Therefore, we began the beginnings of our search for the best bathroom scale with accuracy leading the way.

The next findings of our survey determined durability to be something consumers look for when buying a bathroom scale.  Therefore, a bathroom scale should live through the ups and downs and the loss and gains.  So, we combined accuracy with durability.

And, this pretty much narrowed down our options.  However, our final picks were further based on style and reviews.  So, those that looked great and had very happy consumers topped our final list.

Best Bathroom Scale

However, there are a few individualistic needs which you need to consider.  The first is minimum and maximum weight.  Is this scale going to be able to configure the weight for which you need it for?  Furthermore, if you’re looking for a scale which also detects your weight down to the decibel, this will help narrow down your options on our list.

The next individualistic need to consider is if a non-slip scale will be more appropriate for you.  Some consumers like to jump on the scale after the shower and that may get a little slick.  In addition, if you’re prone to slipping or there are little ones running around, a non-slip scale may be your best bet.

Finally, how’s your eyesight doing?  If you’re one who requires glasses or contacts, look for the largest display you can find.  And, this is because we don’t always have our glasses or contacts in, so a larger display will reduce the squinting it may take to read the darn display.

 

Best Bathroom Scale

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale
Greater Goods
Weight Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
11.8" x 11.8" x 0.8"
Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale
Etekcity
Digital Weight Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
12" x 12" x 0.9"
RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale
RENPHO
Bluetooth Body Fat Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
Bluetooth
App Compatible
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Color Options
11" x 11" x 1"
Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale
Detecto
D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale
Metal
Vinyl
Dial
Slip Resistant
11.25" x 11.75" x 3'
Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale
Famili
271B Digital Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Slip Resistant
12" x 13" x 0.8"
Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale
Kinzi
New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Lbs/Kilos
11.8" x 11.8" x 0.8"
Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale
Greater Goods
Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale
Tempered Glass
Silicone
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Slip Resistant
Color Options
12" x 12" x 0.9"
Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale
Greater Goods
Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale
Tempered Glass
Automatic
Wifi Connectivity
App Compatible
LCD Screen
Battery Operated
Color Options
12.6" x 12.6" x 0.9"

 

Best Bathroom Scale

Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale

Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale

Our first pick for best bathroom scale features an extra-large display, perfect for those who have compromising eyesight.  The Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale has an extra-large LCD screen illuminated by a backlight.  This is also great for those weighing-in during low light hours or in darker circumstances.

This bathroom scale is outfitted with a tempered glass top which is able to hold up to 400 pounds.  Tempered glass is ultra durable as it is 5 to 10 times stronger than regular glass.  Furthermore, this scale sits on 4 scratch-resistant and non-slip feet.  This will help protect your floors while keeping the scale stable for accuracy.

The Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale will measure weight from 11 pounds to 400 pounds.  In addition, it will measure your weight to the exact decimal point.

To use this scale, simply step right up.  And, it’s this easy because it runs on 2 lithium batteries which are replaceable.

Finally, the Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale is a soft grey color.  This subtle, yet sleek scale, will go with any decor without screaming scale.

Pros:

This scale is extremely responsive.  Furthermore, it is very accurate if you’re using it on a level floor.  If you’re using it on a not-so-level floor, you may see a few pounds difference.

In addition, the design and color of this scale make it a favorite amongst consumers as it is highly unobtrusive.

Lastly, this bathroom scale has one of the largest displays on our list.  So, if your eyesight is compromised, this may be one to consider.

Cons:

Although the Greater Goods Weight Bathroom Scale has non-slip feet, the tempered top does not offer any resistance to slipping.  Therefore, this may not be a great option for those with little ones running around or for those who are prone to slipping.

 

Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale

Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale

This next pick for best bathroom scale is another one with a tempered glass platform.  The Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale features 6 millimeters of tempered glass for ultra durability and for a maximum weight of 400 pounds.

This bathroom scale automatically powers off and automatically sets back to zero.  Furthermore, it will alert you when the battery is low and if the weight exceeds the maximum.

And, for those with less than desirable eyesight, this scale features a large, LCD display with a backlight for low-light situations.

The Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale will read weight from 11 to 400 pounds and down to the decimal.  And, this is calculated by 4 high-precision sensors for ultimate accuracy.

Finally, this bathroom scale runs on 2 1.5V AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.  Furthermore, because this scale automatically powers off, this will help to preserve the life of the batteries.

Pros:

Style-wise, this is another unobtrusive pick.  It is sleek and unassuming but looks fabulous.

In addition, the Etekcity Digital Weight Bathroom Scale is highly accurate, durable and easily readable.

Cons:

Because this scale has black tempered glass, you can see stains fairly easily.  So, to keep it looking pristine, you may be wiping it down often.

Furthermore, this scale has non-slip padding on the bottom.  However, the top platform is not slip-resistant.

RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale

RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale

If you’re looking to track your progress, this is a great option to consider.  The RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale works via Bluetooth with the Apple Health, Google Fit and Fitbit apps.  And, once you’re synced up, you can take your weight and it will connect to the apps without the need for your phone.

This body fat scale will display your body weight while data, like BMI and body fat percentage, is stored on the apps.  Furthermore, RENPHO offers its own app which will track the following 11 different metrics:  Body Weight, BMI, Body Fat Percentage, Water Percentage, Skeletal Muscle, Fat-Free Body Weight, Muscle Mass, Bone Mass, Protein, Basal Metabolism and Body Age.  In addition, the RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale can track unlimited users.

This body fat scale is made of 5 millimeters of tempered glass with a non-slip base and the maximum weight should not exceed 396 pounds.  This scale also measures in increments of 0.2 pounds, so you will get an accurate reading down to the decimal.

The RENPHO Bluetooth Body Fat Scale features a large LED display with a backlight.  This backlight will illuminate the weight measurement in low-light situations.

Finally, this body fat scale runs on 3 replaceable AAA batteries which are included.  And, the scale comes in your choice of colors:  Black or White.

Pros:

If you’re serious about getting healthy, this is a fantastic place to start.  The app will alert you to your progress, or for some of us, alert us to our transgressions.  Whatever the case may be, this reminder is like a fit buddy and will help us to stay on track.

Furthermore, this body fat scale is highly accurate and durable.

Cons:

For some people, the idea of connecting to an app is beyond comprehension.  However, the good news is, it’s rather easy.  And, once you get it down, it’s done.

That being said, some consumers felt the scale was accurate but the app was anything but.

 

Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale

Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale

If you’re looking to keep things simple, the Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale will allow you to do just that.

This pick for best bathroom scale features heavy-duty construction with a white enamel finish.  The platform consists of non-skid vinyl which will keep the scale stable and help prevent injuries due to slipping.

The Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale will support up to 300 pounds and will configure weight from 0 to 300 pounds.  Furthermore, this scale has a large dial which is easy to read.

Finally, the Detecto doesn’t need any batteries as it works like an old-fashioned scale.  So, just step on to get a reading and it’s all set for the next session.

Pros:

The Detecto D1130 Large Dial Bathroom Scale has a vintage look to it that will easily go with any decor.

Furthermore, we love the non-skid vinyl platform which is great for those who are prone to slipping.  Also, it doesn’t need any batteries which reduces hassle in the long run.

Cons:

Some consumers found the dial hard to read without glasses or contacts.  So, depending on how bad your eyesight is, you may want to take this into consideration.

 

Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale

Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale

This pick for best bathroom scale automatically turns on when you step on.  And, it automatically turns off once you step off.  The Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale runs via 2 AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.

This digital bathroom scale measures weight from 11 to 400 pounds.  In addition, it has a maximum platform weight of 400 pounds.

The Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale features a 0.8 inch thick plastic platform which sits on 4 rubber feet.  This plastic platform boasts a round nodule pattern which will prevent slipping.  Furthermore, the rubber feet will help keep the scale stable and from sliding around.

Finally, this digital bathroom scale has a large LCD display which is illuminated with a backlight.  This will help to see the results in low-light conditions.

Pros:

This scale pretty much checks everything off our list:  accuracy, durability, anti-slip, large display and automatic functions.

Furthermore, the Famili 271B Digital Bathroom Scale offers a great texture which is very comfortable to stand on.

Cons:

It seems some consumers received duds which gave inaccurate readings.  However, most consumers agree the customer service in this particular situation was beyond great.

 

Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale

Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale

This pick for best bathroom scale is one of the highest reviewed scale on our list.  The Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale is also one of the thinnest scales on our list.  Furthermore, it comes with removable extension legs.  So, if you choose to add these legs, you can prop it up a bit.  Or, you can just leave it flat on the floor.

This digital bathroom scale measures weight from 9 to 400 pounds.  Therefore, the weight limit with this scale is set at 400 pounds.

The Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale automatically turns on once you step on, and it automatically turns off once you step off.  This will help extend the life of the batteries.  And, speaking of batteries, this digital scale runs on 2 included Lithium batteries which are replaceable.

This digital bathroom scale features an extra-large LCD screen with a backlight.  This backlight will assist you in low-light conditions.

Finally, the Kinzi Digital Bathroom Scale is thin, sleek and an unobtrusive color which will work with just about every decor.

Pros:

Consumers love this bathroom scale.  It’s easy to use, features a modern design, it’s accurate and it’s easy to read.

Furthermore, if you’re looking for a bathroom scale which is able to measure other units of weight, the Kinzi New Precision Digital Bathroom Scale will also measure stones and kilograms.

Cons:

Some consumers received scales that gave inaccurate readings.  If this happens to you, be sure to contact the company.

In addition, this digital bathroom scale does not have a non-slip platform.

 

Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale

Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale

This is a fun one.  The Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale comes with a scale and a Slate Gray silicone cover.  However, you can switch up the covers with your choice of the following purchased separately:  Aqua, Raspberry, Rose Quartz, Stone Grey or Wheat Grass.

This scale features a tempered glass platform and a silicone cover.  And, this silicone has a beveled pattern making it non-slip and skid-resistant.

The Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale has a disappearing LED display.  Once you step on the platform, the display will shine through the silicone cover to reveal your weight.  And, once you step off, your weight disappears…if it could only be that easy. 🙂

The Greater Goods Silicone Digital Bathroom Weight Scale is able to measure in pounds or kilograms by a press of a button.  And, it will support and measure a weight of up to 400 pounds.

Finally, this digital bathroom scale runs on 4 AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.

Pros:

We are in love with the design of this scale and the fact that you can switch up the colors.  Furthermore, the silicone top is a nice touch as it offers a firm platform to keep things stable.

In addition, it is able to calculate kilograms and pounds, which very few scales on the US market have that feature.

Cons:

Some consumers claim to have received an inaccurate scale.  However, it is important to note that there are hundreds of satisfied consumers.  And, just be sure when using any scale, that you place it on a level surface.

 

Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale

Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale

Our final pick for best bathroom scale is another one that is compatible with major fitness apps.  The Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale will connect to apps like Apple Health, Google Fit, FitBit, MyFitnessPal, Amazon Echo and more.  And, this scale offers a free Weight Gurus app in which you and 7 other users can view your individual progress.  All you need is WiFi to connect your results to the app.

The Great Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale measures weight, body fat, BMI, muscle mass, water weight and bone mass.  And, these results will show up on the scale, as well as the app.

This bathroom scale features a tempered glass platform which can hold up to 400 pounds.  And, it will record precise readings down to the decimal.

Furthermore, the bottom of this scale has non-slip, scratch-resistant feet.  This will help keep the scale stable while protecting the floors.

The Greater Goods Wifi Smart Connected Body Fat Bathroom Scale features an extra-large LCD screen with a backlight.  This backlight will help users see their results in low-light conditions.

Finally, this bathroom scale runs on 4 AAA batteries which are included and replaceable.  And, to preserve battery life, this scale will automatically turn on when you step on and turn off when you step off.

Pros:

Some of us just want the weight, body fat, BMI, muscle mass, water weight and bone mass readings without the app.  And, this scale does just that.  However, the app is fantastic if you want to track your results and give yourself something to celebrate.

Cons:

Some users had trouble getting past the Wifi setup.  And, after further research, it looks like an issue with the Wifi chip they received.  It’s important to note that most consumers received a good chip, however, if you’re one of the unlucky ones, make sure you contact the company.

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

So, you’re a big kid and you’re looking for the best bean bag chair for adults.  We get it, there’s absolutely nothing wrong with living out your childhood dreams.  In fact, it’s rather healthy to tap into your inner child and live out the basic desires we had as a kid.

Therefore, for the kid in all of us, we went on a treasure hunt for the best bean bag chair for adults.  And, we found some incredible picks that are a near-exact replica of the bean bags we grew up with.  However, we also found a few bean bags which are an innovative take on the age-old classic.

But, there are a few things to take into consideration when picking out the best bean bag chair for adults.  And this comes down to, which one is right for you?

First, everyone’s idea of comfort varies.  Therefore, take into consideration what type of lounging you will be doing.  Do you want to sink into the bean bag or do you want a more upright, posture-perfect position?  And the older we get, the less limber our bodies are.  So, depending on how your flexibility is treating you, you should pick out a bean bag accordingly.

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

Secondly, the other thing to consider is getting out of the bean bag.  If you’re looking at bad knees or an injury to your back, you may want to go with a bean bag which sits higher up off the ground.  This is so you’re able to get out of the bean bag without further injury yourself or putting unnecessary pressure on some rather sensitive parts.  So, if you’re prone to re-injuries, we do suggest a firmer, more upright bean bag.

Now that we’ve got the adulting out of the way, it’s time to talk about stuffing.  The stuffing is what makes the bean bag the “bean” bag.  However, when it comes to bean bags for adults, you will see a couple of different types of stuffing.  Some have beans while others have a memory foam filling.  So, please be cautious and keep in mind that not all fillings are beans.

Next, when choosing the best bean bag chair for adults, you will have plenty of options with the outer layer.  There are bean bags with a velvety smooth cover, classic cotton, polyester for easy maintenance or vinyl for some added style.  And, what you choose should be a reflection of your decor and the type of comfort you’re looking for.

Lastly, pick out the size that’s right for you.  Our final picks for best bean bag chair for adults come in all different sizes, with some catering to teens and smaller-sized adults, while others can hold 2 or 3 adults at a time.

 

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair
Flash Furniture
Oversized Bean Bag Chair
Polystyrene Beads
Cotton Upholstery
Machine Washable
Color Options
42" x 42" x 19"
Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair
Lumaland
Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair
Memory Foam
Micro Suede Upholstery
Machine Washable
Color Options
Size Options
3' - 7'
BeanBob Bean Bag Chair
BeanBob
Bean Bag Chair
Memory Foam
Polyester Upholstery
Machine Washable
Carrying Handle
Color Options
3' x 3' x 3'
Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair
Jaxx
6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair
Shredded Memory Foam
Micro Suede Upholstery
Machine Washable
Color Options
72” x 72” x 20”
Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair
Big Joe
Milano Bean Bag Chair
Polystyrene Beads
Upholstery Options
Color Options
32" x 28" 25"
Gold Medal Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag
Gold Medal
Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag
Polystyrene Beads
Vinyl Upholstery
Color Options
35" x 34" x 27"
Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair
Majestic Home Goods
Classic Bean Bag Chair
Polystyrene Beads
Polyester Upholstery
Indoor/Outdoor
UV Protected
Machine Washable
Color Options
28" x 28" x 22"

 

Best Bean Bag Chair for Adults

Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair

Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair

Our first pick for best bean bag chair for adults is as classic as you can get.  The Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair is stuffed with foam beads which consists of breathable polystyrene.

And, this bean bag chair is covered with cotton upholstery which is removable and machine washable.  In addition, you can also wipe down this cotton  upholstery with a damp cloth if need be.

This Flash Furniture Bean Bag Chair is oversized which can accommodate kids and larger adults alike.  Measuring in at 42 inches long, 42 inches wide and 19 inches tall, this bean bag chair for adults can cater to just about everyone in the family.

Furthermore, the Flash Furniture Oversized Bean Bag Chair is rather light at approximately 10 pounds.  And, that makes this bean bag easy to transport from room to room.

Finally, with this bean bag, you get your choice of 16 different colors and some pattern options.  Choose from Camaflouge, Denim, Gray, Green Dot, Hot Pink, Lavender Dot, Light Pink Dot, Mint Green, Navy Blue, Purple, Red, Royal Blue, White Furry, Brown, Green or Pink.

Pros:

This bean bag is well made, comfortable, and for most adults, it is roomy enough to spread out.

Furthermore, it is easily adjustable to garner more back support if need be.

Cons:

While most consumers are happy with this purchase, some state this bean bag needs more filling.  Luckily that issue is easily solvable as you can purchase additional filling here.

Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair

Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair

If you’re looking for soft and luxurious, this is a pick to consider.  The Lumaland Luxury 5-Foot Bean Bag Chair has a micro suede cover that will keep you cozy and coddled.

This micro suede cover is removable to reveal a protective beige polyester cover.  So, while you’re machine washing your outer cover you can continue to lounge away.  Furthermore, this inner cover will allow for extra added protection against spills.

The Lumaland Luxury Bean Bag Chair is large in size and can comfortably fit 2 regular-sized adults.  Or, you can relax and spread out all by yourself.  It measures 48 inches long by 60 inches wide.

However, if you’re looking for something smaller or larger, you have your choice of sizes.  Choose between 3 feet, 4 feet, 5 feet, 6 feet or 7 feet.

This pick for best bean bag chair for adults is filled with high quality foam material designed to keep your body temperature regulated.  In addition, this foam retains memory so it will form to your body for ultimate comfort.  So, if you’re looking for the classic bean feel, you may want to check out some of our other picks.

The Lumaland Luxury Bean Bag Chair comes in 8 color options:  Black, Red, Brown, Navy Blue, Purple, Light Blue, Light Green or Dark Grey.

Pros:

Because this bean bag is made of memory foam, it will form to your shape.  So, if you’re looking for more support, this is one to consider.

Additionally, the Lumaland Luxury Bean Bag Chair comes in multiple sizes, so you may even be able to replace the couch if need be.

Cons:

Some consumers felt the memory foam was too stiff.  However, they may have been expecting the traditional beans.  So, make sure you know what you’re ordering with this one.

Furthermore, some consumers had issues with the dye of the outer cover bleeding onto their carpet and wood floor.  The best bet is to wash the outer cover a few times before using.

BeanBob Bean Bag Chair

BeanBob Bean Bag Chair

This pick for best bean bag chair for adults sits higher off the ground.  So, if you’re looking for an easy in and easy out, this is a contender.

The BeanBob Bean Bag Chair measures 3 feet by 3 feet by 3 feet.  So, it is large enough to fit just about every size of adult.

This bean bag chair for adults is filled with virgin foam.  Virgin foam is made of polyurethane and this particular foam will mold to the shape of your body.  Therefore, this bean bag chair will offer you extra support.

The BeanBob Bean Bag Chair comes with a removable outer cover.  This cover is machine washable to help keep the chair in pristine condition.

Finally, to easily transport this chair from room to room, it comes with a convenient carrying handle.

Pros:

Consumers agree, this bean bag is extremely durable.  In addition, it is a great product, especially for the price.

Cons:

If you’re looking for actual bean filling, you may want to check out some of our other picks.  The BeanBob Bean Bag Chair is filled with memory foam.

Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair

Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair

If you’re looking to spread out, this bean bag chair for adults will allow you to do just that.  However, it also allows you to sit in it like a regular ol’ bean bag by flipping it on its side. So, with this pick for best bag chair for adults, you get the best of both worlds.

The Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair features a micro-suede polyester cover which is removable, machine washable and dryable.  And, this cover is soft and comfy.  Therefore, if you’re looking for a luxurious cozy-feel, this chair is heaven.

This bean bag for adults contains shredded memory foam.  This will allow you to sink in the bag while the bag forms to the curves of your body.  So, if you’re unsure to go with beans or a foam bag, this is a great compromise.

Finally, the Jaxx 6 Foot Cocoon Large Bean Bag Chair comes in your choice of colors.  Choose between Aqua, Black, Camel, Charcoal, Chocolate, Cinnabar, Mandarin or Navy.

Pros:

This bean bag chair can hold up to 2 adults comfortably.  Furthermore, this bag is one of the more comfortable ones on the list due to the shredded memory foam.  This foam will also give you extra support.

In addition, we love that you can use this bag by spreading it out or propping it up in the traditional bean bag style.

Cons:

Some consumers complain that there isn’t enough foam filling.  However, it is important to note that most consumers are extremely happy.  And, as one consumer stated, you need to allow the foam plenty of time to expand after removing it from the packaging.

 

Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair

Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair

This bean bag chair really emphasises the chair part.  The Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is designed just like a chair but with the bean feel.

This bean bag chair can accommodate children and adults alike.  It measures 32 inches long, 28 inches wide and 25 inches tall.  And, word on the street is it can accommodate larger-sized adults as well.

The Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is outfitted with a soft, plush fabric.  However, there are many options when it comes to this chair.  You can choose between parachute-like material, vinyl-like material, plush and even a shag.  Furthermore, just follow this link and you will find never-ending color options.

This pick for best bean bag chair for adults is filled with UltimaX Beans.  These beans are refillable and you can find the refills here.  UltimaX Beans are made of virgin polystyrene and are 100% recyclable.  Furthermore, these beans are small, dense and long-lasting.  

Finally, the outer cover of the Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is double-stitched and comes with 2 safety locking zippers.  This will help ensure the beans stay where they’re intended to stay.

Pros:

The Big Joe Milano Bean Bag Chair is extremely well made and durable.  And, if you’re looking for back support, this is an excellent option.

Furthermore, since it sits higher off the ground, it’s easy to get in and out of.

Cons:

The cover is not removable, therefore, you can’t machine wash it.  However, this bean bag chair cleans up nicely with a damp cloth.

 

Gold Medal Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag

Gold Medal Large Leather Look Tear Drop Bean Bag

If you’re into the retro look, the Gold Medal Large Tear Drop Bean Bag is as retro as you’re going to get.  And, this will not only go with the retro type of decor but it can easily slide in with a modern style of decor.

This bean bag is outfitted with vinyl and filled with virgin polystyrene beans.  The vinyl covering is double stitched and comes with a child safe zipper to keep the beans inside the bag where they belong.  Furthermore, the vinyl is durable and cleanup is as easy as wiping it down with a damp cloth.

The Gold Medal Large Tear Drop Bean Bag measures 35 inches long, 34 inches wide and 27 inches tall.  And, because of the tear drop shape, it provides back support and an easier exit than traditional shaped bean bags.

Lastly, you get your choice of colors.  Choose between Black, Cobblestone, Green, Hot Pink, Medium Blue, Navy, Purple, Scarlet or Wine.

Pros:

We love the style of this particular bean bag.  And, we mentioned it can go with retro and modern decor, however, we can also see it fitting right in with a western style of decor and even country.

Furthermore, this bean bag is durable and the vinyl is tough.  So, expect this bag to last a while.

Cons:

Some consumers felt this bag didn’t have enough filling.  However, you can purchase extra filling here.

Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair

Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair

Our final pick for best bean bag chair for adults can work both indoors and outdoors.  The Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair features a UV protected outer cover made of polyester.  Furthermore, the polyester is high quality and ultra durable.  And, the good news is, this outer cover is removable and machine washable.

This bean bag chair also comes with an inner cotton cover.  This cover helps keep the beans in place.  And, speaking of beans, the Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair is filled with polystyrene beans which are 50% recycled.

This bean bag chair best accommodates teens and smaller-sized adults.  The measurements run 28 inches long, 28 inches wide and 22 inches tall.  And, this chair weighs approximately 7 pounds.

Lastly, the Majestic Home Goods Classic Bean Bag Chair comes in your choice of colors:  Sage Green, Black, Chocolate Brown, Gray, Navy Blue, Pink, Yellow, Burnt Orange, Sage Red, Teal Blue or Tiffany Blue.

Pros:

This bean bag chair is a classic choice all around.  In addition, it comes with the classic Chevron print which can add some extra needed pop to any room.

Cons:

Some consumers feel the fabric is rather uncomfortable and the feel of the chair is stiff.  So, if you’re looking for more support, the fact that this chair is on the stiff side may be a good thing.

And, this chair is on the smaller side, with some consumers stating “it’s smaller than expected.”

 

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

7 Best Belgian Waffle Makers

So, how do you like your waffles?  Answering this question will determine which of these 7 best Belgian waffle makers are right for you.  And, just like chefs, each of these waffle makers have their own individualistic style of cooking.

Do you like deep dish waffles?  How about lightly browned waffles with a crispy outer texture?  Or, how about fluffy waffles or flat as a pancake waffles?  Our picks for best Belgian waffle makers has something for everyone.

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

In addition, each of these waffle makers vary on how many waffles you can make at one time.  So, if you’re feeding a family of 6, you may want to consider cooking in bulk and choosing a waffle maker accordingly.  If you’re cooking for one, you may want to consider going with a 2 slice waffle maker or you maybe even want to check out the waffle iron which cooks right on the stove top.

So, whatever your taste may be, you can find it on our list.  Furthermore, each of these picks for 8 best Belgian waffle makers are highly regarded amongst consumers and they have the reviews to back them up.

 

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker
Cuisinart
WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
4-Slot Pancake Plate
6 Temperature Controls
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
Removable Plates
9.7" x 12.2" x 6.3"
KRUPS 8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker
KRUPS
8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
5 Temperature Controls
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
Removable Plates
12.6" x 6.7" x 16.5"
Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker
Cuisinart
WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker
2 x 4-Slice Waffle Plates
6 Temperature Controls
180 Degree Rotation
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
10.6" x 16.5" x 10.2"
Breville The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker
Breville
The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
12 Temperature Controls
Batter Settings
Indicator Lights
Indicator Alert
15.8" x 8.8" x 18.5"
Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker
Oster
1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
Temperature Controls
180 Degree Rotation
Indicator Lights
Drip Tray
14.3" x 5.8" x 10.4"
NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron
NordicWare
15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron
4-Slice Waffle Plates
PFOA-Free
17" x 8" x 2"
Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker
Hamilton Beach
Flip Belgian Waffle Maker
4-Slice Waffle Plates
3 Temperature Controls
180 Degree Rotation
Indicator Lights
Drip Tray
14.9" x 9.9" x 9.1"

 

Best Belgian Waffle Makers

Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker

Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker

Our first pick on our list for best Belgian waffle makers will whip up some thick and fluffy waffles.  And not only can the Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker cook some incredible waffles in a 4-slice Belgian waffle plate.  In addition, it also comes with a 4-slot pancake plate to switch things up a bit.  So, if you have a family of 1 to 4 people, this size of waffle maker should suit you just fine.

The Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker features 6 temperature controls.  If you would like your waffles on the fluffier side, use settings 1 through 3.  If you’re looking for a crispier outer layer, use the higher settings.  And, speaking of fluffy, this waffle plate is deep enough to make 1 to 1-1/2 inch thick waffles.

Cooking with the Cuisinart is simple.  Once the waffle maker reaches its cooking temperature, a “Ready to Bake” indicator light will alert you to pour in the waffle or pancake mixture.  And, once its finished cooking according to your desired setting, the “Ready to Eat” indicator will light up and you will hear an unmistakable beep alerting you to some fresh-baked heaven.  Time to dish up.

The Cuisinart WAF-300 features non stick removable plates which are dishwasher safe.  Furthermore, this Belgian waffle maker has an attractive brushed steel outer layer which will fit in flawlessly with any decor.

Finally, for easy storing until the next waffle showdown, this Belgian waffle maker has the capacity to sit upright.  And this works well when storing in cupboards as it saves precious room.

Pros:

Because the Cuisinart WAF-300 Belgian Waffle Maker comes with a pancake plate, this also can be used for grilled sandwiches and paninis.

In addition, this waffle maker cooks rather fast with each waffle taking roughly 2 to 3 minutes.

Cons:

Although this Belgian waffle maker cooks rather fast, it takes almost 3 times as long to heat up.

Furthermore, some consumers felt this Belgian waffle maker looked durable, but found it to be flimsy in construction.

Lastly, the Cuisinart Belgian Waffle Maker doesn’t come with a handle lock so the top can fly open if not handled properly.

KRUPS 8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker

KRUPS 8000035972 GQ502D Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker

This next pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers is for those of us who are craving Belgian waffles that are on the thinner side.  The KRUPS Belgian Waffle Maker can cook up to 4 slices of Belgian waffles at one time.  And, at this rate, this is great for a household of up to 4 people.

This Belgian waffle maker features 5 adjustable browning settings which you can set from light to dark.  And, it has red and green indicator lights to let you know when the waffle maker is on, when it’s ready for the waffle mixture and when it’s ready for consumption.  In addition, each of these stages in the process comes with a beep so you can audibly hear when each stage is complete.

The KRUPS Adjustable Temperature Belgian Waffle Maker comes with removable die-cast plates with non stick coating.  Die-cast is simply the process in which these plates are made.  The metal is poured into a cast under high pressure until it forms into a mold.  These plates are removable and dishwasher safe for easy cleaning.

Finally, this Belgian waffle maker will look great in just about any kitchen as it is made of stainless steel.  And, once you’re ready to store it, it has a convenient cord wrap and a handle lock to keep things secure.

Pros:

This pick on our list for best waffles makers is a great waffle maker for the price.

And, it comes with 5 browning settings so you can get the perfect amount of crispiness.

Cons:

If you’re looking for real Belgian waffles, these waffles might disappoint you as they are much thinner than the real deal.

Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker

Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker

This Belgian waffle maker was rated the best Belgian waffle maker by America’s Test Kitchen.  Now, we consider ourselves to be experts but America’s Test Kitchen always has the final say.  So, the experts have spoken and this is the best Belgian waffle maker money can buy.

Furthermore, this Belgian waffle maker is made with durability and quality.  The outside of the waffle maker features stainless steel with non stick waffle plates on the inside.  However, it is important to note that these waffle plates are not removable, so cleanup will be a bit more tedious.

The Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker can cook 2 4-slice Belgian waffles at once.  So, if you’re looking to feed a lot of people then this is a pick to consider.  

This waffle maker cooks up to 1-inch Belgian waffles with deep pockets.  In addition, it has 6 settings where you can control your desired level of crispiness.

Finally, the Cuisinart features a 180 degree rotation so the waffles bake more evenly.  And, once the desired time is up, there is an indicator light and 3 consecutive beeps to let you know breakfast is served.

Pros:

This pick on our list for best Belgian waffle makers is a fun one.  It makes you feel as if you’re a part of the process as you flip the waffles over to create a more thorough and evenly baked waffle.

Furthermore, the Cuisinart WAF-F20 Double Belgian Waffle Maker bakes 2 waffles at a time.  And, this is great for households both large and small.  If you’re cooking just for yourself, have seconds!  However, if you just want to cook one waffle at a time, you can do that too.

Cons:

The waffle plates are not removable which makes cleanup a bit more difficult.

 

Breville The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker

Breville The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker

Many consumers agree, this bakes the real McCoy, true deep dish Belgian waffles.  So, if you’re looking for some fluffy heaven-like Belgian waffles, this is a pick to consider.

In addition, The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker by Breville has 12 heat settings so you can control, in near detail, your desired amount of crispiness.  And, you can also specify the batter type to achieve an even more custom baking experience.  These batter types include Belgian, Classic, Chocolate and Buttermilk.

This pick for best Belgian waffle maker is made of stainless steel on the outside and non stick cast aluminum waffle plates on the inside.  Furthermore, these plates are surrounded by a moat to catch any overflow.

The baking begins when you close the top lid.  Once the waffles are done, an indicator light and an audible alert will let you know when breakfast is ready.  Once the waffle is done, this waffle maker will stop cooking on its own.

Finally, just like its name, The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker by Breville bakes 4 waffles at a time.  So, if you’re hungry or you’re feeding a large family, this is a great option to consider.

Pros:

If you want true Belgian waffles, go to Belgium.  Or, you can purchase The Smart 4-Slice Waffle Maker by Breville.  These are true, deep-dish Belgian waffles.

Furthermore, this pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers has the most settings.  So, you can achieve your desired crispiness in near detail.

Cons:

The waffle plates are not removable which will make cleanup a bit more tedious.

Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker

Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker

If you’re on a budget, this is a great pick to consider.  The Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker is not only low on price, but it’s also a space-saving waffle maker.  And, when storing this waffle maker, it stands vertically to save precious space in the cupboard.

This Belgian waffle maker is another pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers that features the flip operation.  This is great for cooking waffles more thoroughly and evenly.

The Oster Belgian Flip Waffle Maker comes with a 1-1/2 inch thick, non stick surface.  And, if you’re looking for thick Belgian waffles, this is one of the thickest on our list.

Furthermore, if you like your waffles crispy, this waffle maker features an adjustable temperature control to cater to your desire.  Once the temperature control is set, this waffle maker heats up quickly.

Lastly, the Oster 1-1/2 Inch Thick Belgian Flip Waffle Maker has a removable drip tray for easy cleanup.

Pros:

For the price, this is a decent machine which cooks exceptional waffles.  So, if you’re not ready to throw down some money on a higher end Belgian waffle maker, this should fuel your appetite in the meantime.

Cons:

The Oster Belgian Flip Waffle Maker is rather difficult to clean as the plates aren’t removable.  Best case scenario, purchase a small soft-head scrub or even a toothbrush to help you reach between the grates.

NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron

NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron

Sometimes simple is better and sometimes cooking Belgian waffles the old-fashioned way is even better.  The NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron comes from a company that was founded in 1946 and who are still manufacturing most of their products in Minneapolis.  And, this company also won the 2015 Minnesota Manufacturing Award for Sustainability.  So, it’s a true salt of the earth company.

The NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron is made of PFOA-free non stick coated cast aluminum.  And, essentially, PFOA means Teflon-free.

This Belgian waffle maker simply works on the stove.  To get the waffles cooking, just preheat the waffle iron on both sides.  Pour in the batter and cook for 30 seconds on one side and 2 to 3 minutes on the other side.  The good news is, the handle stays cool while the waffles are cooking.  Once the waffles are finished, 4 delicious waffles easily go from the iron and onto your plate.

Pros:

This is a definitely a pick to consider, even if you came here looking for an electric Belgian waffle maker.  This company has long-standing values that coincide historically as well as environmentally.  And, they make high quality products.

Furthermore, the NordicWare 15040 Cast Aluminum Stovetop Belgium Waffle Iron cooks up some decadent, crispy waffles that melt in your mouth.

Cons:

This waffle iron takes a little more work than its electric counterparts.  Not much, but a little.  However, these waffles are worth it.

Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker

Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker

The final pick on our list of best Belgian waffle makers is one that cooks thick and fluffy waffles.  In addition, the outside will get nice and crispy.

However, what differentiates this flip waffle maker from the others on our list is the waffle plates are removable for easy cleanup.  So, if you’re set on a flip waffle maker but insist on removable plates, this is a contender.

The Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker is made of stainless steel with non stick waffle plates and a removable drip tray.  Furthermore, the waffle plates and drip tray are dishwasher safe.

This waffle maker has 3 browning settings to help achieve your desired crispiness.  Once the desired cook time is set, a ready light will come on to alert it’s time to add the batter.  Then, lock the batter in place and the waffles are closer to being on your plate.  After about 5 to 8 minutes, depending on how crispy you like your waffles, breakfast is served.

Finally, when flipping the waffles, the Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker features a cool-touch handle.  And, this cool-touch handle folds down for easy storage.

Pros:

The Hamilton Beach Flip Belgian Waffle Maker is the best flip waffle maker if you require removable trays.  Furthermore, this waffle maker is extra easy to clean as it also comes with a drip tray to prevent overflow.  And, the waffle trays and drip tray are both dishwasher safe. 

Cons:

This waffle maker doesn’t come with an audible alert to let you know the waffles are ready.  So, to prevent overcooking, you will need to keep a close eye on them.

In addition, some consumers felt this waffle maker doesn’t cook waffles very evenly.  Therefore, you may want to flip more times than normal in order to get a more evenly cooked waffle.

Best Spin Mop

Best Spin Mop for Small and Large Spaces

If you’re looking for the best spin mop, there are a variety of options you have when choosing the best spin mop for your lifestyle.  And, we found an array of options that will work for you, whatever your scenario may be.

But first, let’s go over some of the options you have in store.  While most of our picks are manual, we have a battery-operated spin mop that will do the work for you.  Sounds like a great plan, right?

However, if you’re looking for something more basic, we have 6 manual spin mops to choose from.  And, most people tend to choose the best spin mop that’s appropriate for their space.  So, if you’re working with a small space, it’s best to go with a smaller bucket.  If you’re looking to spick and span a larger space, you will want to go with a larger bucket.

Best Spin Mop

In addition, when it comes to the larger buckets, some of our picks come with wheels.  Therefore, its less strain on your back and joints.  So, space is also something to take into consideration when choosing a bucket that has wheels.  If you have a larger space to work with, wheels will probably be the most pragmatic choice.

Another aspect consumers run into when choosing a spin mop is storage space.  So, before biting the bullet and choosing the largest spin mop on our list, make sure you have room to tuck it away when the mopping duty is done.

You may also have a situation where you would like to warn others of the dangers of a wet floor.  Therefore, we included a bucket that has the traditional warning sign letting others know there is danger ahead.

Other options some of our final picks possess are splash guard, foot pedal, soap dispenser and adjustable handle.  However, all of our manual picks offer the much desired built-in wringer.

So, take a browse around and get to the know these tools that are designed to make your life a whole lot easier and cleaner.

 

Best Spin Mop

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
O-Cedar EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System
O-Cedar
EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System
Microfiber Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Foot Pedal
Easy-Control Water Release
Splash Guard
Angled Mop Head
360 Degree Rotation
Machine Washable
19.5" x 11.7" x 11.5"
5.38 lbs
Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set
Hapinnex
Spinning Mop Bucket Set
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Self-Balancing
Easy-Press System
Splash Guard
360 Degree Swivel
Latch Lock
Drain Plug
18.1" x 9.1" x 10.2"
3.99 lbs
Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop
Bissell
Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop
Cordless
Battery Operated
Soft Touch Pads
Scrubby Pads
On-Demand Spray
Swivel Steering
16" x 8" x 45"
14.1 lbs
Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System
Finether
Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System
Microfiber Mop Head
Stainless Steel
Built-In Wringer
2-in-1 System
Easy Pour Outlet
12" x 12" x 12"
7.9 lbs
CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop
CycloMop
Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Foot Pedal
Drain Plug
21" x 12" x 11.5"
10 lbs
RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
RoMop
Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Chenille Mop Head
Scrub Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Drain Plug
Wheels
19.5" x 13.8" x 11.5"
7.4 lbs
Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
Mopnado
Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop
Stainless Steel
Microfiber Mop Head
Scrub Mop Head
Built-In Wringer
Soap Dispenser
Wheels
20" x 14" x 11.5"
9.9 lbs

 

Best Spin Mop

 

O-Cedar EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System

O-Cedar EasyWring Microfiber Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System

Our first pick on our list for best spin mop is one of the most highly reviewed mops out there.  The O-Cedar EasyWring Spin Mop and Bucket Cleaning System has a pretty impressive list of features that make cleaning much easier.

However, it is important to note that the bucket does not come with wheels.  So, if you don’t mind carrying the bucket from room to room or you’re working with a smaller space, this is an option to consider.  If you’re looking to wheel a bucket around as the task at hand is rather large, you may want to consider some of our other options.

The O-Cedar EasyWring Spin Mop and Bucket Cleaning System features a built-in wringer.  And, this wringer works by simply stepping on the foot pedal.  This foot pedal also controls how saturated you want the mop.  So, if you’re looking for a saturated mop, just push down on the pedal once.  If you’re looking for a damp mop, push down on the pedal 5 times and so on.

And to keep things tidy, the bucket features a splash guard.  So, when you’re ringing out the mop, the water stays where it should – inside the bucket.

This spin mop is made of microfiber which is suitable for all hard surface floors, including wood floors.  Microfiber is gentle enough so it doesn’t scratch the surface of the floor, but it is tough enough to remove dirt and grime.

In addition, this spin mop features a mop head in the shape of a triangle.  This will ensure you reach those corners adequately and efficiently.  And, it has a flexible mop head which rotates in a 360 degree motion to reach just about anywhere.

Finally, this mop head is machine washable and we recommend you let it air dry.  Also, it is recommended you replace the mop head every 3-6 months.  Of course, this depends on how often you will be using the mop.

Pros:

This spin mop is one of the most highly reviewed mops on the market.  And this means thousands of satisfied consumers.  The O-Cedar EasyWring Spin Mop and Bucket Floor Cleaning System has just about every feature you could imagine with a mop.

Cons:

Although most consumers are happy with this product, there are some consumers who state this mop broke after a few months of use.

In addition, if you’re looking for a mop with wheels, this is probably the only feature this mop is lacking.

Lastly, some consumers have complained the mop is rather short in size.  So, if you’re on the tall side, you may want to check out another option.

 

Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set

Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set

This spin mop touts a self-balanced bucket.  So, if you are looking for extra security to make sure the water stays inside the bucket as intended, this an option to consider.  And, along with the self-balanced bucket feature, this spin mop also features a detachable splash guard.

The Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set features a 360 degree swivel head and rotates up to 180 degrees to clean under hard to reach areas.  And, attached to the swivel head is a washable and replaceable microfiber mop head.  Microfiber is gentle enough to work on all hard-surfaced floors including wood floors as it will not scratch the surface.

This spin mop works by way of an Easy-Press system.  Just push down on the handle and this will activate the spinning mechanism.  If you would like to wring the mop out further, just give it another push.

However, the one thing to consider with this particular spin mop is it doesn’t come with wheels.  So, if you’re working with a smaller space, this may be suitable for you.  If you’re working with a larger space, you may want to check out our other picks which offer wheels.

The Hapinnex Spinning Mop Bucket Set is made with plastic and stainless steel.  Therefore, this mop is more durable than their all-plastic counterparts.

And speaking of durability, this spin mop comes with a latch lock.  This will help secure the length of the pole to avoid a rather awkward mopping session.

Finally, the mop bucket features a convenient drain plug which sits towards the bottom of the bucket.  This is a great feature for easy draining, especially when you have a bucket full of dirty water.

Pros:

This pick for best spin mop is a great choice for smaller spaces.  And, because it features a self-balanced bucket, this will greatly reduce the awkwardness when carrying this bucket from point A to point B.

In addition, we love the drain plug included with this bucket.  It makes the job of emptying the bucket so much more fluid.

Cons:

This is another pick which doesn’t come with wheels.  However, for a lot of people, this isn’t necessary.

And, a few consumers have complained that the mop handle fell apart after a few uses.  It is important to note, though, that the majority of consumers are very satisfied with their purchase.

 

Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop

Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop

This is perhaps the easiest spin mop you can own.  The Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop pretty much does the work for you.  It runs on 18 volts of Lithium ion batteries to clean for up to 20 minutes.

And because it runs on batteries, it is cordless.  So no switching outlets, no getting the cord trapped in the doorway, it’s just mop and go.

The Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop works on all hard-surfaced floors that are sealed.  This includes wood, tile, linoleum and marble floors, to name a few.

This battery-operated spin mop comes with soft touch pads for a gentle clean or scrubby pads for a more thorough cleaning.  Furthermore, these pads are machine washable and dryable.

To operate the Bissell Spinwave Cordless Hard Floor Mop, simply fill the tank with the cleaning solution, spray the desired amount of solution onto the floor by way of the On-Demand spray system and power the mop on.  This spin mop essentially does the rest.

Pros:

This pick for best spin mop is, by far, the easiest way to mop the floors.  And, there’s not even any pushing involved as this mop just glides on its own.

Furthermore, the Bissell Spinwave is lightweight, easy to maneuver and comes equipped with swivel steering.  This will help to mop those hard to reach places.

Cons:

Although this battery-operated spin mop is easy to maneuver, some hard to reach areas are just too hard to reach.  For instance, behind the toilet or in narrower passageways.

In addition, some consumers complain this mop doesn’t apply enough pressure.  So, if you’re mopping up after kids or dogs, you may want to go the more manual route and check out some of our other options on this list.

 

Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System

Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System

This is a great option for those with limited space as it’s the smallest spin mop cleaning system on our list.  So, this would work for those who live in a small-sized apartment and/or for those who have limited storage space.

The Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop Cleaning System is made primarily of stainless steel, so this mop is durable and will likely last you a while.  Furthermore, the stainless steel is rust proof for added longevity.

This spin mop features a 2-in-1 design where the dirty deed of mopping can be done in one basket.  Simply fill the bucket and insert the mop.  Then, push the handle down on the mop until it clicks.  Once the mop is locked into the basket, pull up on the handle and the basket is raised above the water and ready to wring.

The Finether Single Bucket Spin Mop features a microfiber, yarn-like mop which sits at a low-profile position to clean hard to reach areas.  Furthermore, because it is made of microfiber, this is safe to use on all hard-surfaced floors including wood floors.

Finally, once you’re finished mopping, the bucket has an easy pour outlet on the side to rid the dirty water without making a mess.

Pros:

This pick for best spin mop is a great solution for those with a small space.

Furthermore, because this mop is made with rust-proof stainless steel, this spin mop cleaning system should last you a while.

Cons:

A couple of consumers complained about the bucket leaking.  Also, a couple of consumers found this mop not to be user-friendly as it is hard to maneuver it in and out of the bucket.

 

CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop

CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop

If you’re mopping a space that it utilized by a lot of people, it may be wise to consider giving people a warning that there is wet floor ahead.  The CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop features a hard-to-miss caution sign with the traditional yellow color.

And, this commercial spin mop is built-in typical commercial fashion, which is built to last.  The bucket is made of hard plastic with a stainless steel spinner.  And, the mop handle is made of a lightweight metal material.

The CycloMop Commercial Spinning Wet & Dry Mop features a microfiber, yarn-like mop head which is ultra absorbent.  It is also machine washable and replaceable.

To use this commercial spin mop, simply fill the bucket, dip the mop and spin away using the foot pedal.  And, you also have your choice of saturation level.  If you want less water on the mop head, tap the pedal 5 times.  If you want less, just tap once.

Finally, this pick for best spin mop comes with a drainage spout towards the bottom of the bucket.  And this keeps things relatively clean when draining the dirty water after the deed.

Pros:

This spin mop is well made and will last a long time.  Furthermore, this mop bucket gives a clear warning to help prevent accidents.

Cons:

This is one pick that should have wheels but doesn’t.  In addition, some consumers found the bucket rather heavy to lug around.

Lastly, some consumers find the mop isn’t that mobile which makes it hard to clean hard to reach areas.

 

RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

This is a great pick for those who are on the taller side.  The RoMop Easy to Go Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop adjusts anywhere from 36 inches to 64 inches.  And, this is the longest adjustable handle on our list.  Furthermore, along with having the longest handle, this spin mop set is one of the largest picks on our list.  So, it’s great for those with a large space to work with.  Just make sure you have the adequate space to store it in.

This spin mop features wheels and a convenient handle to roll from one destination to the next.  This will help prevent unnecessary splashing and the awkwardness of carrying a bucket of water around.  In addition, the bucket comes with a water release valve, so when you’re finished mopping, you can easily discard the dirty mop water.  And, this also prevents unnecessary splashing.

The RoMop Easy to Go Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop comes with 2 microfiber mop heads, a chenille mop pad and a scrub brush.  The microfiber heads are great for sealed hard-surfaced floors, including wood floors.  And, the chenille mop pad is great for doing the windows, while the scrub brush is for cleaning tile and grout.  Furthermore, these mops heads are all washable and replaceable.

Finally, this is one of the more durable picks on our list.  The handle and the spin bucket are made of stainless steel while the bucket itself is made of high quality plastic.

Pros:

Consumers rave about the quality of this pick for best spin mop.  So, if you’re looking for one of the highest quality mops, this should be a contender.

In addition, the parts of the bucket are easily removable, which makes cleaning the bucket a breeze.

Cons:

There’s not many negatives to this mop.  A couple of consumers felt it was a little difficult to use, but other than that, the majority of consumers are extremely happy.

 

Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop

Our final pick for best spin mop touts an easier spin than all the rest.  The Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop features plate gears which help to lighten the force needed to spin the mop.  And, in order to spin the mop, just use the handle as a lever to get that thing rolling.

This spin mop is perfect for those with a larger space to mop.  It comes with wheels and a handle to make it easy to get from one room to the next.  Just make sure when all is said and done that you have the space to store it.

The Mopnado Stainless Steel Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop comes with 2 microfiber mop heads which are great for all sealed hard floors including hardwoods, stone, marble, tile and laminate, to name a few.  And, it also comes with a scrub brush to clean grout and tile.

This spin mop features a 180 degree swiveling mop head which will make it easy to reach hard to access areas.  Furthermore, the handle is adjustable up to 56 inches so you can mop out of reach places such as windows.  However, if you’re on the taller side, this may not be enough length for you.  So, you may want to check the RoMop above.

Another notable feature of the Mopnado is it has a built-in soap dispenser.  This soap dispenser is removable and refillable.

Finally, if you’re looking for quality, this is another one of our picks that is built to last.  The mop handle and the spin basket are made with rust-resistant stainless steel, while the rest is made of high quality plastic.

Pros:

The built-in soap dispenser is a great feature and is large enough to last for a few mop sessions.  This all depends on the amount of space you have to mop, though.

In addition, this pick for best spin mop set is made with quality and is built to last.

Cons:

There is no drainage system with the Mopnado Deluxe Rolling Spin Mop.  So, if this is a requirement, we suggest checking out the RoMop above.

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

6 Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

Weighted blankets just hit the mainstream and its about time.  These blankets have been used for years to help calm the nerves of children with autism and other sensory disorders.  Now, it has been discovered that weighted blankets can help relieve the anxiety that causes restlessness.  And, according to Medical News Today, weighted blankets induce the release of melatonin, the hormone that helps promote sleep and helps to regulate the sleep cycle.  So, with all of this newly discovered information and with our own troubles of falling asleep, we set out to find the best weighted blankets for adults on the market.

And through our search, we found a vert important factor to consider when choosing the right weighted blanket.  Weighted blankets are not a one-weight-fits-all scenario.  Weighted blankets come in an array of different weights, so choosing the correct weight, where it’s not too heavy and not too light, is the first step in order to choosing the best weighted blanket for you.

So, the first question you should ask yourself is, what weight to get for a weighted blanket?

According to the Friendship Circle, a weighted blanket should be about 10% of your body weight.  So, if you weigh 150 pounds, you should be looking for a 15 pound blanket.  If you’re 200 hundred pounds, a 20 pound blanket is what you should be looking for.

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

What if there isn’t a blanket available that is 10% of your weight?  This will be a personal decision whether you would like to round up or down.  Usually people tend to round upwards.  But, again, this is all up to you.

So, the next step is to determine how big you want your blanket.  And, this is a decision which typically lies on your sleeping arrangements.  If you have a partner who has no trouble sawing Zzz’s, you may consider a blanket that measures half the bed size.  If you’re lucky enough to have the whole bed to yourself, you may consider decorating the entire bed with a weighted blanket.

Which leads us to the final decisions to make, which is style and material.  Our final picks for best weighted blankets for adults are all made with quality material and come in some gorgeous shades.  Furthermore, we made sure that each one of our picks wouldn’t stand out like a weighted blanket, but more like a blanket that was chosen from someone with a good eye for style, which ultimately will be you.

 

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Quility Premium Weighted Blanket
Quility
Premium Weighted Blanket
Cotton
Poly-Filled
Removable Duvet
Non-Toxic
Hypoallergenic
36" x 48" = 5 lbs
41" x 60" = 10 lbs
48" x 72" = 12 lbs
48" x 78" = 15 - 25 lbs
60" x 80" = 15 - 25 lbs
YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket
YnM
Cooling Weighted Blanket
Bamboo Viscose
Poly-Filled
Glass Beads
Cooling
Color Options
48" x 72" = 15 lbs
60" x 80" = 15 - 20 lbs
Luna Weighted Blanket
Luna
Weighted Blanket
Organic Cotton
Poly-Filled
Non-Toxic
Cooling
60" x 80" = 20 lbs
Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket
Platinum Health
Premium Weighted Blanket
Minky
Poly-Filled
Glass Beads
Textured
Duvet
Color Options
60" x 80" = 12 lbs
YnM Weighted Blanket
YnM
Weighted Blanket
Cotton
Glass Beads
Duvet
Color Options
48" x 72" = 15 lbs
Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket
Kpblis
Premium Weighted Blanket
Cotton
Poly-Filled
Non-Toxic
Hypoallergenic
Duvet Options
Color Options
36" x 48" = 5 lbs
40" x 60" = 10 lbs
48" x 72" = 12 - 15 lbs
60" x 80" = 17 - 22 lbs

 

Best Weighted Blankets for Adults

Quility Premium Weighted Blanket

Quility Premium Weighted Blanket

This blanket sits at the top of our list for best weighted blankets for adults for a variety of reasons.  The Qulity Premium Weighted Blanket checks off all of our requirements with some pretty spectacular bonuses.

One of the biggest features of this weighted blanket is it is built for year round use.  The Quility Premium Weighted Blanket has a removable fleece duvet cover which can be removed for the scorching summer months to keep you cool.  Once the chill of the fall nights roll in, simply slide the fleece duvet back on and secure with the 10 buttons that are strategically placed to deliver a traditional duvet look.

The other benefit to this duvet is it will help to keep the weighted portion of the blanket clean for the majority of the year.  And, when it’s time to clean, there’s nothing like throwing the duvet in the wash as opposed to the hassle of dry cleaning – not to mention the cost that comes with that.

The Quility Premium Weighted Blanket is constructed of 100% cotton and filled with non-toxic, hypoallergenic plastic pellets.  And, to keep these pellets in place, this weighted blanket relies on small, stitched squares to help the blanket keep its shape.

Finally, this blanket comes in a variety of weights and your choice of a cotton-feel or a minky feel.

Pros:

The removable fleece duvet is a huge plus.  And, this duvet even has the traditional ties where you can secure the corners of the blanket so it doesn’t get twisted around.

Furthermore, this pick for best weighted blanket is non-toxic and hypoallergenic for an even better rest.

Cons:

Like we mentioned, this blanket has a duvet which can be taken off during the summer months.  However, it doesn’t come with a summertime duvet to protect the blanket.  You may want to consider keeping the duvet on year round or purchasing a separate summer-appropriate duvet.

YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket

YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket

We are in love with the material of the YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket.  This weighted blanket is made of 300 thread count bamboo viscose.  And, according to Cariloha Bamboo, bamboo is a much better choice than cotton as it is stronger and softer.  Not to mention, bamboo is a self-replenishing crop and the benefits to the environment by consuming bamboo are enormous.

The YnM Cooling Weighted blanket is filled with polyfill and glass beads.  These beads are placed in small, stitched squares to keep the fill in place and the blanket in tip-top shape.

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults is great for those who get hot and tend to perspire during the night.  And this is because this blanket is made with SMART fabric and moisture wicking.  This is a breathable fabric that will help to circulate the air and control perspiration.

The YnM Cooling Weighted Blanket comes in your choice of colors:  Dark Grey or Sea Grass.  And, YnM also has a travel blanket up for grabs.  This travel weighted blanket is 10 lbs and comes with a convenient carrying case.

Finally, this weighted blanket is machine washable.  However, because weighted blankets are rather heavy on a wash machine, it is recommended you spot clean or purchase a separate duvet.

Pros:

Keeping things cool is another tactic for a good night’s rest.  So, because this weighted blanket uses SMART fabric and moisture wicking, this blanket will help keep your temperature regulated all night long.

Cons:

It doesn’t come with a duvet, so to keep things clean, you may have to purchase one separately.

And, according to some consumers, this blanket runs on the small side.  So, be sure to size up.

Luna Weighted Blanket

Luna Weighted Blanket

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults is made of 100% organic cotton.  And, this is a very breathable fabric, so if you’re prone to overheating and sweating, this is a weighted blanket to consider.

The Luna Weighted Blanket is filled with high-density plastic poly pellets which are odorless and non-toxic.  And, these are food grade pellets to ensure quality.  Furthermore, this fill comes enclosed in small, stitched squares to help ensure the blanket keeps its shape.

And, thankfully, this weighted blanket is machine washable and can be tumble-dried on low.  However, this all depends on if your wash machine and dryer can handle the weight.

Pros:

First and foremost, this blanket is made with absolute quality.

In addition, we love this weighted blanket for its organic properties.  Furthermore, the fabric is breathable which will help to relieve perspiration throughout the night.

Cons:

This blanket doesn’t come with a duvet cover.  Therefore, you may have to purchase one separately.  If you decide to go without a cover, this weighted blanket is machine washable.  But, like we stated before, this depends if your machine can handle the weight.

Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket

Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket

If you’re looking for a plush blanket with a luxurious feel, this is one to consider.  The Platinum Health Premium Weighted Blanket features a minky fabric cover.    And, as described by fabric.com, minky resembles the feel of real mink.  It has a short pile and the softness feels like cashmere.

In addition to the mink-like feel, this weighted blanket has a SensaDot™ texture pattern.  This pattern is intended to satisfy those who like to fidget.

Furthermore, this fabric cover is removable for easy cleaning.  Simply machine wash and dry on low heat.

This blanket is intended as a one-weight-fits-all blanket.  Platinum Health claims that most consumers prefer 12 lbs of weight.  So, with their one-weight-fits-all philosophy, they only offer a 12 lb blanket.  However, this is just the beginning.  With this blanket, if you want more weight, simply fold the blanket in half to double the weight.  If you want less weight, use half the blanket and so on.  And, the good news is, this blanket is plenty large in size to accomplish all of this.

Finally, this blanket comes in your choice of color combinations.  Choose from Blue/Green, Purple/Gray, Pink/Gray, Coffee/Cream, Gray/Gray, Mint/Gray or Light Blue/Gray.

Pros:

This one-weight-fits-all philosophy is perfect for those who intend on sharing a blanket.  And, this blanket can accommodate an adult just as easy as a child.

In addition, this is a great blanket for those who get a little chilly at night as this blanket keeps you toasty.  In a good way, of course.

Cons:

Some consumers have had issues with the inner ties securing the blanket.  And, consequently, the blanket gets twisted and turned inside the cover.

Furthermore, this blanket can get pretty toasty.  So, if you’re someone that gets hot during the night, you may want to check out some of our cooling options.

YnM Weighted Blanket

YnM Weighted Blanket

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults is another one from the highly regarded brand YnM.  

This YnM Weighted Blanket is made of 100% cotton with glass bead filling.  These glass beads are hypoallergenic, non-toxic and odorless.  And the benefits to choosing glass beads over plastic beads is glass beads are quieter.  So, if you’re tossing around, these glass beads won’t be keeping your mind churning.

The YnM Weighted Blanket comes equipped with a washable duvet cover.  And, not only is the duvet cover washable, but the blanket as well.  Of course, that is if your washing machine can handle the extra weight.

Finally, the YnM Weighted Blanket comes in your choice of textures, colors and patterns.  Choose from Cotton Blue, Cube and Pure Grey Flannel, Lattice Scroll Flannel and Flamingos.

Pros:

This weighted blanket comes in your choice of textures.  So, you can choose from a softer feel or a more cotton-like feel.  And, this is a win-win for those who get too hot and a win-win for those who get too cold.

In addition, the YnM Weighted Blanket has a removable duvet cover which is a necessity to keep the blanket preserved.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained about the quality of the stitching.  However, it is important to note that most consumers are very satisfied.

Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket

Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket

Our final pick for best weighted blankets for adults is our favorite in terms of style.  The Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket comes in soothing, zen-like colors that are more representative of a home decor magazine.  So, if style is high on your list, without a doubt, this is your blanket.

The Kpblis Premium Weighted Blanket is made of 100% cotton and filled with non-toxic, hypoallergenic poly pellets.  These pellets are sewn into small squares to help ensure the weight is evenly distributed and the blanket keeps its shape.

And, although this blanket doesn’t come with a duvet cover, this blanket offers loops which will help secure the blanket inside of a duvet.  This attests to the quality and the thoughtful details Kpblis used while in the design process.

Furthermore, this company makes its own duvet covers you can purchase separately.  So, if you love the color choices and the style, this is a huge plus.

Finally, speaking of colors, you have your choice of Dark Navy, Grey or Dark Grey.

Pros:

This pick for best weighted blankets for adults gets an A++ for style and color.  In addition, because we love their color choices so much, the fact they make their own duvets, is a huge bonus.

Furthermore, the attention to detail with this weighted blanket is a huge selling point.

Cons:

Some consumers felt the blanket they received was on the small size, therefore, you may want to size up.  Of course, this is if the weight allows.

In addition, if you’re someone who gets hot at night, you may want to check out some of our cooling options.  This blanket tends to get hot and is not recommended for the summer months.

 

Best Small Microwave

Best Small Microwave – Top 6 Countertop Picks

If you’re looking for the best small microwave to fit a particularly small space, we’ve got you covered.  We searched through tons of microwaves and found the most highly regarded and top reviewed small countertop microwaves on the market.

So, what did we look for when we searched for the best small microwave?  First, we took into account small spaces, nooks and crannies.  And not every microwave is a one size fits all ordeal.  Therefore, we wanted a variety of sizes, from extra small to small, that would cater to nearly every consumer out there.

Best Small Microwave

Next, we searched for quality.  And along with quality comes durability.  Our final picks had to withstand the constant abuse we put microwaves through and live through the ordeal to tell about it.  Well, the live through part we made sure of.  A talking small microwave is something we have yet to see in the future.

Then, we wanted bonus options.  Because small microwaves are more compact, they can only have so many options.  So, while not all of our final picks for best small microwave have the same options, they all have something that will cater to our microwave needs.  Whether it’s a turntable, auto defrost, a 30 second option, popcorn button or 10 power levels, these tiny microwaves deliver some much-desired bonuses.

So, to reiterate, our requirements for the best small microwave include:

  • A variety of sizes from extra small to small.
  • Quality and durability.  This includes scouring user reviews to ensure longevity.
  • Bonus options.

 

Best Small Microwave

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Whirlpool Countertop Microwave
Whirlpool
Countertop Microwave
Stainless Steel
Clock
Interior Light
LED Display
Turntable
30 Second Option
Popcorn Button
750 Watts
0.5 Cubic Feet
13.75" x 14.13" x 15.38"
Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave
Sharp
R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave
Stainless Steel
Dial Timer
Interior Light
1,000 Watts
1.0 Cubic Feet
20.5" x 16" x 12.1"
Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven
Daewoo
KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven
4 Automatic Levels
5 Power Levels
2-Way Defrost
Interior Light
LED Display
Zero Standby
Child Safety Lock
700 Watts
0.7 Cubic Feet
12.7" x 17.6" x 10.6"
Panasonic NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven
Panasonic
NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven
Stainless Steel
Dial Timer
Interior Light
1,000 Watts
0.8 Cubic Feet
16.6" x 20.1" x 12"
Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven
Sharp
ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven
Stainless Steel
Clock
Interior Light
LED Display
Turntable
30 Second Option
Popcorn Button
Beverage Button
Auto Defrost
900 Watts
0.9 Cubic Feet
12.4" x 8.7" x 13.7"
Westinghouse 600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven
Westinghouse
600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven
Stainless Steel
Dial Timer
Dial Settings
Defrost
Interior Light
Color Options
600 Watts
0.6 Cubic Feet
17.75" x 12.5" x 10.25"

 

Best Small Microwave

 

Whirlpool Countertop Microwave

Whirlpool Countertop Microwave

Our first pick on our list is the smallest at 0.5 cubic feet.  However, the Whirlpool Countertop Microwave is extremely roomy for its size as it will accommodate a dinner plate up to 11 inches in diameter.  Furthermore, because of the height of this microwave, you will have no problems inserting taller mugs or tumblers.

This pick for best small microwave offers a whopping ten power levels, including defrost.  It also features 750 Watts of power, which is extraordinary for a microwave at this size.  The preferred wattage for a microwave is at 1,000 watts.  However, according to Goodhousekeeping, microwaves with less than 700 watts are slower and may not cook evenly.  And, the higher the wattage the better.  So, this microwave hits above the 700 watt range and cooks accordingly.

Other features of this countertop microwave include 10 levels of cooking power which includes defrost, a rotating turntable to assist in cooking evenly, tap touch controls for easy handling and easy cleaning, a 30 second button and a one-touch popcorn button.

The Whirlpool Countertop Microwave offers a blue LED display and a lighted interior so you can keep an eye on your prize while its cooking.

Finally, once your food is ready, this countertop microwave will alert you with 3 consecutive beeps.  Thereafter, it will remind you every 30 seconds.

Pros:

This pick for best small microwave gets an A++ for style.  It has a subtle retro design that can nonchalantly fit with any decor.

Furthermore, for such a small microwave, this unit is stacked.  It has nearly all the wants and needs of a larger microwave.

Cons:

It seems some consumers received a defective product.  While the majority of consumers are happy, just beware you may be testing your luck with this one.

Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave

Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave

At 1.0 cubic feet, this countertop microwave is considered a standard size for small microwaves.  The Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave can accommodate a 13.5 inch dinner plate.  Furthermore, it has plenty of clearance from top to bottom to fit taller-sized items.

The Sharp R-21LCF Medium-Duty Commercial Microwave operates on 1,000 watts.  And like we mentioned earlier, the higher the wattage, the quicker and more evenly the food cooks.  So, 1,000 watts is a great amount of power to get the job done.  Furthermore, with this microwave, it cooks by way of a magnetron.  Magnetrons emit radio waves, so there’s no need for a rotating turntable to ensure even cooking.

This countertop microwave comes with a dial timer which can be set from 10 seconds to 6 minutes.  If you wish to cook longer, just reset the timer once the 6 minutes is up.  To cancel the cooking at any time, simply open the door or turn the dial back to zero.

The Sharp R-21LCF Commercial Microwave features a dim interior light so you can keep an eye on your food while its cooking.  In addition, the dial has an orange light which will flash as the timer counts down.  Once the cooking time is up, the Sharp Commercial Microwave will alert you with a single ring.

Pros:

With this countertop microwave, you can adjust the cook time while you’re cooking, which with a lot of microwaves, you have to go through the whole cancellation process in order to achieve this.

Another feature we love about this microwave is it is easy to clean.  And, this is due to the microwave using a magnetron heating mechanism instead of a rotating turntable.

Lastly, because this is a commercial microwave, it is built to last.

Cons:

This pick for best small microwave is as simple as you can get.  It doesn’t have all of the bells and whistles, and in all actuality, it is pretty bare bones.  There is no defrost and no preset settings.  While this might be a turnoff for a lot of people, simple is sometimes better.

Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven

Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven

If you’re on a budget, this little machine will serve you well.  The Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven offers a lot of bang for a little buck.  At under $100, this pick for best small microwave oven offers 4 automatic cooking levels, 5 power levels and 2-way defrost.

However, because this is a budget pick, you will be using 700 watts of power.  This means there will be longer cook times and chances are, uneven cooking.  The good news is, this countertop microwave comes with a rotating turntable which will assist with cooking your food more evenly and thoroughly.

The Daewoo KOR-7LREW Retro Microwave Oven is eco-friendly as it features a zero standby function.  The zero standby function will reduce your power consumption, thus reducing your carbon footprint.

This pick for best small microwave is on the smaller side of the scale with 0.7 cubic feet of interior space.  This will accommodate up to a 10.5 inch dinner plate.

Finally, other notable features of this microwave are the child safety lock, interior light, LED display and an alert to let you know dinner is ready.

Pros:

We are really digging this microwave for its extra bonus features and its style.  It is a great little machine for those who live in tiny spaces like apartments and dorms.

Furthermore, the zero standby function is a great addition.  It’s nice to know that power is reduced while not in use.  This will not only save on your electric bill, it will also extend the life of the microwave – not to mention take a little toll off the environment.

Cons:

This microwave has only 700 watts of power.  However, at this price range, this is the wattage range you’re going to get.  The good news is, this microwave is outfitted with a rotating turntable to offset the lower watts.

Panasonic NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven

Panasonic NE-1025F 1000W Commercial Microwave Oven

This is another small commercial microwave oven that is worthy of a spot on this list.  However, this microwave oven is even smaller at 0.8 cubic feet.  

But, don’t let the size fool you.  This commercial microwave will fit half-size pans at 6 inches tall with the cover on.  And, to get a better grasp on how roomy this microwave is, a half-size pan measures 12 inches by 10 inches.

The Panasonic NE-1025F Commercial Microwave Oven runs on 1,000 watts of power.  And with this amount of watts, you will see quicker cooking times and more thorough cooking.  Also, this microwave does not use a turntable.  Instead it features an antenna which rotates, ensuring even cooking.

This countertop microwave works by turning the dial anywhere from 10 seconds to 6 minutes.  To adjust the time while you’re cooking, simply turn the knob.  And, if you want to cancel the cooking prematurely, just open the door or turn the dial back to zero.

Finally, the Panasonic NE-1025F Commercial Microwave Oven features a Grab & Go door handle.  This means you can just open the door without messing with any levers or buttons.  This microwave also features an interior light, a lighted dial so you can easily keep track of time and 5 beeps to alert you when your food is ready.

Pros:

For the size of this microwave, it has a lot of power and is very roomy.  And because it is a commercial microwave, it is durably built to last.

Furthermore, since this microwave doesn’t come equipped with a turntable, it is very easy to clean.

Cons:

If you’re looking for extra features, you may want to keep looking at some of the other microwaves on our list.  This microwave is as simple as you can get, no defrost, no turntable, no presets and no clock.

Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven

Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven

This is perhaps our favorite budget pick on our list.  Not style-wise but functionality-wise.  The Sharp ZSMC0912BS 900W Countertop Microwave Oven offers a variety of automatic functions.  This includes auto defrost, auto beverage, auto popcorn and auto reheat buttons.  This countertop microwave also features a convenient 30 second button and one touch buttons to cook up to 6 minutes.

The Sharp Countertop Microwave Oven offers 900 watts of power, so you’re still in the range where you will see quick cook times and even heating.  Furthermore, this countertop microwave oven comes with a carousel turntable to ensure even and thorough cooking.

And, there’s no need to worry about room.  This microwave oven has 0.9 cubic feet of interior space which is enough to accommodate a full-size dinner plate or roughly 11 inches.

Finally, in addition to all of the above, the Sharp Countertop Microwave Oven comes with an interior light and a blue LED display.  And, once your food has finished cooking, you will be alerted by 5 consecutive beeps.

Pros:

It’s not hard to see the positives with this microwave.  It has everything you would expect with a standard-sized microwave.  So, if you’re looking to get your money’s worth, this is, hands down, the right choice to make.

Cons:

We are not in love with the design.  It’s rather basic and microwave-looking.

Furthermore, it seems some consumers have received duds.  While this happens occasionally with appliances, its something to be a little wary about.  However, its important to note that most consumers are happy with this product.

Westinghouse 600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven

Westinghouse 600 Watt Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven

Our final pick for best small microwave is another one for those on a budget.  And, this is one that is more classic and simple in design.  The Westinghouse 600 Watt Countertop Rotary Microwave Oven features a rotary dial for easy operation.

And, this is one of the smaller microwaves on our list.  So, if you’re looking for the smallest microwave you possibly can, this is one of your contenders.  This microwave features 0.6 cubic feet of interior space with a 9.5 inch turntable.  Therefore, you’re looking at a microwave that accommodates a 10 inch dinner plate.

The Westinghouse Counter Top Rotary Microwave Oven works by simply turning the rotary dials.  The top rotary dial features defrost, medium low, medium, medium high and high power levels.  Once you have your power level set, you can rotate the bottom dial for your desired time, up to 30 minutes.  When the time is up, you will be alerted by an unmistakable ding.

This countertop microwave offers 600 watts of power.  While this isn’t ideal, it is enough power to heat food, albeit at a slower rate.  However, it does come with a rotating turntable to help ensure even and thorough heating.

Finally, with this microwave, you have your choice of colors:  Black or White.

Pros:

If you’re looking to outfit a rather small space without any frills or any gimmicks, this is a great option.

Cons:

We are weary of the low amount of wattage offered by this microwave.  So, if you’re looking for occasional cooking, such as in a dorm or an RV, this may suit you just fine.

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

8 Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

When searching for the best area rugs for kitchen, there’s not a lot of selection in that particular category.  Therefore, we had to expand our search to other rug categories in order to deliver a selection of the best area rugs for the kitchen that would cater to our high-traffic needs.

And, there were a few requirements we had in mind when choosing these rugs.  First, the kitchen is a bustling place and an area rug in this particular place should be able to handle all the back and forth that goes on throughout the day.  Therefore, this requirement enabled us to set our sights on quality and durability.

Next we searched for the best area rugs for kitchen that would be able to handle the flying crumbs and random spills that are just apart of kitchen life.  So, we made sure our selection of rugs were easy to clean and/or stain resistant.  Furthermore, with some of our picks, we were also able to find mildew-resistant rugs.  And this is crucial for those spills that go unnoticed.

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

The third requirement we determined to be a necessity is something to keep the rug in place.  The last thing you want to worry about when transporting a pot full of hot water is sliding across the kitchen.  So, each one of our picks is either made of materials that are resistant to slipping, whether it is due to non-slip backing or a particular material the rug is made out of.

And, slipping is not the only thing there is to worry about.  With a lesser quality of rug, we often find the corners to turn upwards which is a trip hazard.  Consequently, the rugs you see on our list will all lay flat or they will have a seemless edge.  

Lastly, and certainly not least, our selection of best area rugs for kitchen need to look good.  Therefore, we chose an array of timeless options that will be sure to go with just about every decor.  And, don’t forget, most of these rugs come in a multitude of colors.  So, if you’re not jiving with the color but love the pattern and texture, you may want to click for further options.

 

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug
Vanill
Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug
PVC
Non-Toxic
Allergin Free
Slip-Resistant
Color Options
35.4" x 23.6"
47.2" x 27.5" - 70.8"
59" x 80.7" - 118"
63" x 23.6" - 31.5"
70.8" x 23.6"
94.5" x 23.6"
Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug
Ottomanson
Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Shed-Resistant
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
Color Options
2'7" x 7'
5'3" x 7'3"
Kangaroo Brands The Original 3/4" Kangaroo Anti-Fatique Comfort Kitchen Mat
Kangaroo Brands
The Original 3/4" Kangaroo Anti-Fatique Comfort Kitchen Mat
Foam
Anti-Fatigue
Non-Toxic
Phthalate-Free
Slip-Resistant
Waterproof
Color Options
32" x 20"
39" x 20"
70" x 24"
Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug
Diagona Designs
Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
Fade-Resistant
Color Options
2'7" x 9'10"
5'3" x 7'3"
63" x 87"
6'7" x 9'3"
7'10" x 9'10"
nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug
nuLOOM
Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug
Jute
Anti-Static
UV Protected
Slip Resistant
Color Options
2'3" x 4'
2'6" x 8'
4' Round
5' x 8'
6' Round
8' Round
8' x 10'
9' x 12'
Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug
Ottomanson
Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Shed-Resistant
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
UV Protected
Color Options
1'10" x 7'
2' x 5'
3'3" x 5'
5' x 6'6"
8'2" x 9'10"
20" x 59"
Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug
Kapaqua
Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug
Polypropylene
Low Pile
Shed-Resistant
Stain-Resistant
Mildew-Resistant
Slip-Resistant
UV Protected
Color Options
2' x 4' - 20'
3' x 5' - 10'
5' x 7'
7' x 10'
8' x 11'
Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat
Fab Habitat
Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat
Recycled Plastic
Reversible
Mildew-Resistant
UV Protected
3' x 5'
4' x 6'
5' x 8'
6' x 9'

 

Best Area Rugs for Kitchen

Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug

Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug

The first pick on our list for best area rugs for kitchen is a great solution for families or a household that happily creates a mess.

The Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Rug is made of high quality PVC, which resists environmental deterioration, is non-toxic and is resistant to dust and allergens.

Furthermore, you will get your use of this rug as PVC is both durable and flexible.    

The Vanill Kitchen Vinyl Mat Linoleum Rug lays completely flat on the floor, once you’ve prepped it for display.  To prep the mat, simply lay it out in the sun so the material softens.  Once it softens, spread it flat and you have the perfect surface to cook on.

The other aspect of this rug that stands out to us is it is comfortable to walk on.  Because it is made of flexible PVC, you will enjoy a slight cloud-like feeling with every step.  In addition, the PVC will allow the rug to naturally stay where its intended to stay.  So, no slipping or sliding around. 

The Vanill Kitchen Rug is easy to clean, simply wipe with a damp cloth.  However, it is recommended you refrain from using harsh cleaners.

Finally, this kitchen rug comes in all sorts of colors and gorgeous designs.  Because there are too many to list, we suggest you take a browse through them here.

Pros:

Vanill makes gorgeous designs for their rugs.  And, their color palettes are perfect for the kitchen.

In addition, the material is perfectly suited for high-traffic kitchens as it is both durable and non-toxic.

Cons:

If you’re looking for the actual texture of a rug, this rug may not be your first choice.  However, the Vanill Kitchen Rugs are soft and comfortable to walk on and the material is perhaps the most logical choice for a kitchen.

 

Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug

Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is made to withstand the outdoors.  So, what will withstand the outdoors will surely withstand the kitchen.

The Ottomanson Jardin Collection Natural Indoor/Outdoor Jute Rug is made in Turkey, of polypropylene construction, in a woven jute fashion.

And while jute is typically woven from natural fibers, this rug is woven with polypropylene.  The benefits to this, beyond durability, is it won’t absorb moisture as a typical jute rug would.  In fact, it won’t absorb it at all.  And this makes it a perfect rug for those random spills that happen in the kitchen. 

Another aspect which sets this rug apart from the naturally woven jute rug is this rug won’t shed.  So, you won’t be cleaning up fibers along with the crumbs.

The Ottomanson Jardin Collection Jute Rug has a low pile weight which lays flat on the floor.  This low pile weight will allow for a near seemless transition from the floor to the carpet.  And, like we stated before, this will help prevent tripping your way across the kitchen.

This area rug for the kitchen is easy to care for.  Simply spot clean and vacuum regularly.  And, it comes in your choice of 4 different colors:  Brown, Cream, Dark Brown or Mocha.

Pros:

The Ottomanson Jute Rug has a natural feel with all of the durability and very few drawbacks.  Most notably, its resistance to shedding and soiling.

Furthermore, this rug is stain-resistant and mildew-resistant.

Cons:

Because this pick for best area rugs for kitchen does not have slip-resistant backing, you may find that it will slip on wood or marble floors.  For an easy fix, check out these non-slip pads you can purchase separately.

 

Kangaroo Brands The Original 3/4" Kangaroo Anti-Fatique Comfort Kitchen Mat

Kangaroo Brands The Original 3/4″ Kangaroo Anti-Fatigue Comfort Kitchen Mat

If you’re looking for comfort, you have found your “rug.”  However, this pick is more appropriately called a mat.  And this mat is not only comfortable but it is rehabilitating.  It will help to improve posture, condition muscles and sooth aches and pains.

Sounds too good to be true, right?  It does, however, when we first stepped on this mat, we didn’t want to leave.  This mat is absolute heaven.

The Original Kangaroo Anti-Fatigue Comfort Kitchen Mat is made of 3/4 inch top grade foam which is non-toxic and phthalate-free.  This foam helps to eliminate pressure on the joints, back, feet and extremities, while providing support for long periods of time.  So, if you’re someone who is in the kitchen all day, this mat is a must have and will make the kitchen a more enjoyable place to be.

Furthermore, this mat is heavy-duty.  It is extremely durable and will keep its shape over time.  It is also waterproof and features a slight texture for a slip-resistant surface.  And, the underside of the mat has a grooved surface to keep the mat in place while the sloped edges offer a smooth transition when stepping from the floor onto the mat.

To care for this mat, simply vacuum and wipe clean with a damp cloth.  You can also scrub it and hose it off if need be.

The Original Kangaroo Anti-Fatigue Comfort Kitchen Mat comes in your choice of 9 colors:  Beige, Black, Brown, Gray, Hunter Green, Mocha, Navy, Red or Sand.

Pros:

The comfort of this mat is undeniable.  It is extremely supportive and relieves pressure from your head to your feet.

However, the other notable aspects of this mat is it’s very durable and easy to maintain.

Cons:

To be completely honest, when we first laid eyes on it, we felt it was rather unattractive.  That is until we stepped on it and it quickly grew on us.  The plus side to this mat is it does come in different colors, so depending on how you match the color to your kitchen, it may just be love at first sight.

 

Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug

Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is made with a durable synthetic pile with a jute-style backing.  And, this jute-style backing is also synthetic.  So, you won’t have to deal with shedding that often comes with natural jute material.

The Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug is made of a 100% polypropylene.  Polypropylene is resistant to moisture, therefore, it is resistant to mildew and stains.  Furthermore, it also resistant to fading.  So, if this rug is in a spot where the sun hits, it is UV protected.

This area rug offers a low pile so it will create a near seemless transition from floor to rug.  And, this will help prevent you from tripping your way across the kitchen.  In addition, because of the jute backing, this rug is slip-resistant.

Lastly, the Diagona Designs Contemporary Traditional Moroccan Trellis Area Rug comes in your choice of 5 color combinations:  Grey/Ivory, Ivory/Navy, Navy/Ivory, Ivory/Purple or Ivory/Grey.

Pros:

This rug comes with a natural worn look, so add that to the polypropylene construction, and this rug works well in high-traffic areas.

Furthermore, it has a subtle Moroccan design which will compliment just about any decor.

Cons:

Because this rug is on the thin side, it tends to wrinkle if placed on carpet.  However, if you intend on using this rug on wood, marble or tile floors, you shouldn’t run into this issue.

Also, this rug is intentionally faded in some areas.  While some people love this particular design aspect, some see it as an eyesore.

 

nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug

nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug

If you want to go with a traditional jute rug that is made with natural fibers, this may be the perfect rug for your kitchen.  The nuLOOM Natural Rigo Jute Rug is hand-woven in India with natural jute fiber.

Now, we haven’t touched on what jute really is.  We’ve spoken about the jute weave but jute is a whole different story.  Jute is a natural fiber which is mainly grown in India and Bangladesh.  It is a strong fiber that holds its shape well and offers natural UV protection, as well as, anti-static properties.

Furthermore, jute can be fairly easy to clean.  You can simply run a vacuum over it, brush with a stiff bristle brush or blot with a damp cloth.  These are just some of the ways to care for jute.  But if you need more in-depth detail, you can find it here.

The nuLOOM Natural Hand Woven Rigo Jute Rug is naturally slip-resistant.  However, this particular rug is also trip-resistant.  And this is because it has an oval shape and doesn’t contain any corners that will perk up.  Furthermore, it is low pile, so it will offer an easy transition when stepping from the floor to the rug.

Finally, this rug comes in your choice of colors:  Natural or Beige.

Pros:

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is as natural as you can get.  And, there’s nothing like bringing the outdoors inside.  In addition, this rug will go with any decor.  And, with the natural color selection, you can’t go wrong.

Furthermore, nuLOOM makes quality rugs at a very decent price.  So, with all this being said, you’re getting a great deal with this rug.

Cons:

Because it is made with natural jute material, this rug is prone to mildew.  However, because it is on the thin side, it would take a lot of spills to create mildew.  Our suggestion, if you do spill something, make sure to dry it out as soon as possible.

And, again, because it is jute, it will shed.  Not a whole lot, but you will most likely be seeing more fibers than crumbs.

 

Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug

Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug

Persian rugs look fantastic in the kitchen so we made sure to include a persian-style rug that will hold up in a high-traffic area.  The Ottomanson Otthome Collection Persian Heriz Oriental Non-Skid Area Rug is stain-resistant, slip-resistant, shed-resistant and fade-resistant.  In addition, this rug will not absorb moisture, making it mildew-resistant.  And, it is also easy to clean.  Simply vacuum and clean with a damp cloth and a mild soap.    

Made of 100% polypropylene, this pick for best area rugs for kitchen is a low pile rug which offers a nearly seemless transition from floor to rug.  And, this helps to eliminate the bulk that can cause you to trip as you bustle your way back and forth from counter to counter.  Furthermore, the underside of this rug has a rubber backing, which will help prevent this rug from sliding around.

The Ottomanson Ottohome Collection Persian Heriz Area Rug comes in a multitude of sizes and your choice of 2 colors, Red Heriz or Sage Green Heriz (pictured above.)

Pros:

This pick for best area rug for kitchen has a timeless look to it.  So, not only will it work with just about any decor, it will never run out of style.

In addition, at this price, you can’t beat the quality and the look.

Cons:

Some consumers complain this rug is rather uncomfortable and on the thin side, with one consumer stating it felt more like astro turf.  However, if you’re using it in a high-traffic area such as the kitchen, this may be ideal.

 

Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug

Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug

We love Moroccan patterns so it is no surprise we have yet another Moroccan-inspired rug on our list.  And, the great thing about this particular design is it can go with classic or modern decor.  You can even mix it in with country-inspired decor.

The Kapaqua Rubber Backed Moroccan Trellis Non-Slip Area Rug is machine woven with a loop pile.  In addition, it is a low pile rug, so your chance of slipping on the edge of the rug is greatly reduced.  And, this rug has a rubber backing, so it is also slip-resistant.

This pick for best area rugs for kitchen is made of 100% polypropylene which is resistant to stains, mildew, bacteria and moisture.  It is also easy to care for.  Simply vacuum and wipe with a damp cloth.  And if needed, you can use a mild detergent.

Finally, this rug comes in numerous sizes and colors.  Your color choices are:  Brown, Grey, Ivory, Light Blue, Neon Green, Orange, Pink, Purple, Red, Teal or Yellow.

Pros:

This rug offers all the necessities for the kitchen.  It’s easy to clean, easy to care for, it is slip-resistant, stain-resistant and mildew-resistant.

Furthermore, this area rug for the kitchen comes in all different sizes and colors.  So, your chances of matching the carpet to your decor and space greatly increase.

Cons:

This rug is rather light.  So, even though it comes with rubber backing, you made need to add a non-slip pad to ensure this rug stays in place.  However, everyone has different type of flooring so what slips for one may not slip for another.

Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat

Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Restistant Floor Mat

Our final pick for best area rugs for kitchen is an indoor/outdoor rug.  So, this is going to handle a lot of abuse.  Furthermore, it is reversible.  So, if one side gives, you have the other side to count on.

The Fab Habitat Reversible Indoor/Outdoor Weather Resistant Floor Mat is an eco-friendly rug made of 100% recycled plastic.  This plastic is power loomed in a woven fashion.

And, if you have ever had anything woven of recycled plastic, you will know that it is highly durable and practically lasts forever.  In addition, you’re doing the environment a favor by taking some plastic out of the ocean.

The Fab Habitat Reversible Floor Mat won’t soak up moisture, so it is resistant to mold and mildew.  Furthermore, it is also UV resistant.  Therefore, if the spot you’re looking to place this rug gets any amount of sunlight, you won’t have to worry about fading.

This area rug for the kitchen comes in a multitude of sizes and your choice of colors:  Blue or Teal.

Finally, this rug is easy to care for.  Simply shake off any crumbs or you can even hose it off.

Pros:

Because this rug is made of recycled plastic, it can handle all kinds of abuse.  And, because of this, this rug is great for those with kids and/or pets.

Furthermore, we really respect Fab Habitat’s principles.  They not only make recycled products, but they ensure their products are child-labor free.

Cons:

If this rug obtains a lot of moisture, it can get slippery.  However, if you’re using it indoors, you shouldn’t need to worry about this too much.

best squirrel proof bird feeder

Best Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

If you’re looking for the best squirrel proof bird feeder, we found the top 5 bird feeders that will keep those pesky critters out and the birds coming back for more.

So, how do these bird feeders keep those squirrels at bay?  For starters, these feeders are made with materials that will keep the squirrels from getting anywhere near the bird seed.  Simply put, these bird feeders are chew-proof.

However, what differs with each of these bird feeders is how they keep the squirrels from getting the bird seed where the birds perch.  For instance, one of our picks comes with a motor which will detect the weight of a squirrel and literally spin the squirrel away.  This may sound cruel, but it’s pretty harmless to the squirrel as they are acclimated to moving surfaces such as tree limbs and branches.  So, they can roll with the punches quite easily.

best squirrel proof bird feeder 

Furthermore, a couple of our picks will detect the weight of the squirrel and this will activate a locking mechanism which will shut off the seed supply.  And, a couple of others have a unique design which just simply does not accommodate squirrels.  But, there’s something else you may want to consider to go along with the squirrel proof bird feeder.

Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder Pole

A squirrel proof bird feeder pole can be an extra deterrent from squirrels and something you may take into consideration to further ensure the bird seed goes to who they were intended for.

Squirrel proof bird feeder poles help to deter squirrels by using a “hanging basket” design for the bird feeders.  Then, there is either a spring or a baffle placed in the middle of the pole to prevent the squirrel from scaling the pole and snatching the seed.

Typically, you can use the squirrel proof bird feeder pole with just a normal bird feeder as opposed to a squirrel proof bird feeder.  And, in this case, you may have luck keeping the squirrels away.  However, most people have the best luck keeping the squirrels away by using a squirrel proof bird feeder pole along with squirrel proof bird feeders.  This is pretty much a sure-fire way to keep the squirrels away for good.

So, now you know how to keep the squirrels away, we have the 5 top picks for best squirrel proof bird feeder.  And, these bird feeders are the leaders in the market.  This means, they are well-designed for aesthetic purposes, they have a high rating for squirrel-repellent and they are functional and durable.

 

Best Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder
Brome
1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder
Metal
Water Proof
Rust-Proof
UV Stabilized
1.3 lb Seed Capacity
Seed Ventilation System
5" x 5" x 21"
Arundale The Sky Cafe
Arundale
The Sky Cafe
Recycled Plexiglass
Weather Resistant
1.5 Gallon Seed Capacity
17" x 17" x 17"
Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder
Droll Yankees
Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder
Polycarbonate
Metal
UV Stabilized
5 lb Seed Capacity
8.5" x 8.5" x 28.5"
Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533
The Nuttery
NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder
Metal
Weather Resistant
1.73 lb Seed Capacity
14.2" x 7.9" x 7.9"
Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533
Heritage Farms
Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533
Steel
Weather Resistant
15 lb Seed Capacity
Pole
Hangar
13.5" x 16" x 11.2"

 

Best Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

 

Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder

Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder

Our first pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder is one of the most popular anti squirrel proof bird feeders on the market.  So much so, that this bird feeder gets hundreds, if not thousands, of search engine searches a month.

The Brome 1057 Squirrel Buster Standard Wild Bird Feeder deters squirrels by detecting their weight and closing the seed hatches accordingly.  And, it not only deters squirrels, but larger birds as well.

In addition to this deterrent, this squirrel proof bird feeder is made of chew proof metals.  So, squirrels can’t chew or claw their way to the seed.  This chew proof material is also waterproof, rust-proof and UV stabilized, which will extend the look and the life of the feeder.

The Brom Squirrel Buster features a seed ventilation system at the top of the feeder which releases the humidity and hot air through the vents and replaces it with fresh air.  This will help to keep the seed fresh and more attractive to the birds.

And, with the Squirrel Buster, it is recommended you leave at least 18 inches of room around the feeder in order to force the squirrel to mount the feeder which triggers the closing mechanism.  If you don’t leave this amount of room, the squirrel may find a way to bypass the feeder and mount another part of the bird feeder to gain access to the seed.  And, this is where the squirrel proof bird feeder pole may come in handy.  This pole will enable you to create the 18 inches you need without much forethought.

The other option you have is going with the Brome Squirrel Buster Plus Bird Feed and Accessory Kit.  This comes with the Squirrel Buster Bird Feeder, a pole, a perch ring and a weather guard.

Lastly, the Brom Squirrel Buster measures 5 inches in diameter and 21.5 inches tall.

Pros:

This is a very well designed bird feeder and is made with quality materials.

Furthermore, many consumers raved about how well it deterred the squirrels, with one consumer stating it even deterred a bear!

Cons:

The perches are rather small, comfortably accommodating smaller birds.  However, larger birds have a difficult time perching.  So, if you’re looking to attract larger birds, you may want to go with another option.

Additionally, the seed ports are on the small side.  So, if you’re looking to fill this feeder with larger food items such as fruit or nuts, you may be looking at clearing out the seed ports often.

Arundale The Sky Cafe

Arundale The Sky Cafe

This next pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder has a picture-perfect, postcard-like design.

The Arundale Sky Cafe Bird Feeder is made with 100% recycled plexiglass.  Plexiglass is essentially acrylic, and this is a high-grade plastic material which is resistant to weathering.  In addition, if acrylic is scratched, the scratches can be easily buffed out.

This anti squirrel bird feeder features a 17-inch diameter dome which helps protect the seed from different weather elements such as rain and snow.  Furthermore, and perhaps most importantly, this dome prevents the squirrels from snatching the seeds.

The Arundale Sky Cafe has a wide tray that can accommodate up to 10 birds at once.  And, it comes with a 1.5 gallon seed bucket which will reduce the number of refills needed.

For mounting purposes, the Arundale Sky Cafe can be hung or pole mounted.  Furthermore, if you choose to hang the Sky Cafe, it is recommended that you hang it 5 inches or more from the nearest object, whether it be a tree trunk or a house.  If you choose to pole mount it, it is recommended that it is mounted at least 5 inches from the ground.

In addition, if you are using a chain to hang the Arundale Sky Cafe, allow at least 6 inches of chain above the feeder.  This will further deter the squirrels from trying to access the seeds.

Finally, this anti squirrel bird feeder measures 17 inches in diameter and weighs roughly 5 pounds, without seeds.

Pros:

This bird feeder is well designed and uses acrylic, which is a durable, all-weather material.

And, among consumers, there is a unanimous vote that this bird feeder repels squirrels and repels them good.

Furthermore, consumers state this bird feeder attracts a lot of birds, as well as, a large variety of birds.  In addition, the perching tray allows the birds plenty of room to spread out and move about.

Cons:

It is a bit spend-ier than other bird feeders, however, there’s no denying that this bird feeder has an excellent squirrel-proof design and is beautiful to look at.

 

Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder

This anti squirrel bird feeder is one entertaining feeder.  The Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder works by spinning the squirrel off.  When the squirrel mounts the weight-activated perch ring, it triggers the motor and the feeder starts spinning.  This will knock the squirrels off the feeder and the squirrels won’t be coming back for more.

And, if the squirrels try to perch from the top to access the food, the feeder tube is too long for them to reach the seed.

The spinning motor works via rechargeable and replaceable batteries.  Simply charge the batteries overnight and the batteries will run for months.

The Droll Yankees Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder is made of polycarbonate with a heavy metal cap and perch ring.  According to Plastics Make it Possible, polycarbonate is durable and shatter-resistant.  In addition, this polycarbonate bird feeder is UV-stabilized to retain its appearance and prevent discoloration.

This anti squirrel bird feeder contains 4 feeding ports which will accommodate small and large birds alike.  Furthermore, it has a 5 pound seed capacity to keep you stocked up for longer.  And, it has an internal baffle system which will prevent seed blockage when delivering the seed to the port.

Lastly, the Droll Yankee Flipper Bird Feeder measures 4.75 inches in diameter and 21 inches tall.  It is recommended you secure the feeder 6 feet from the nearest object.

Pros:

If you’re buying this for entertainment purposes, you may find the entertainment to be short-lived.  This is because the Droll Yankees Yankee Flipper Squirrel Proof Bird Feeder works so well, squirrels quickly learn to stay away.

Cons:

A few consumers have stated the battery doesn’t hold its charge for very long after about a year of usage.

In addition, a few consumers have stated the squirrels outsmarted this bird feeder.

 

The Nuttery NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder

The Nuttery NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder

This pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder has its own unique design to keep the pesky critter out.  The Nuttery NT066 Classic Peanut Sunflower Seed Feeder features a cage-like design which prevents the squirrel from reaching the food.

This bird feeder is made with strong metal with a twist lid to easily refill the nuts and seeds.  Furthermore, this metal is durable and will withstand attempted squirrel break-ins and years of weather abuse.

The Nuttery Classic Feeder has a seed capacity of 1.73 pounds which means infrequent refills.  And, to refill this feeder, simply twist the lid and pour the seeds and nuts in.

This squirrel proof bird feeder is perfect for attracting a smaller breed of bird.  However, if you’re looking to feed larger birds, you may want to try another pick.

The Nuttery measures 7.9 inches in diameter and 14.2 inches tall.

Pros:

The Nuttery can handle nuts and seeds without clogging the ports.

Furthermore, this pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder is made of strong metal which will prevent the squirrels from chewing their way to the food.

Cons:

A couple of consumers have issues with this bird feeder rusting after about a year’s worth of use.

Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533

Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder Model 7533

Our last pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder is a heavy-duty option.  The Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder is constructed of all steel.  The green powder-coated steel body is chew proof and will help protect the feeder from weather elements.  In addition, the zinc-plated steel hanger and black powder-coated pole is also weather resistant.

This pick for best squirrel proof bird feeder deters squirrels by using a spring-activated perch.  The perch detects the squirrel’s weight and will shut off the seed supply, preventing the squirrel from feasting on the bird seed.  Furthermore, this bird feeder has a counter balanced perch, where you can set one of three positions to allow small, medium or large-sized birds to access the seed.  If the wrong sized bird perches, the seed supply will shut off.

In addition to the spring-activated perch, the Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Bird Feeder will further deter squirrels with a locking, squirrel-resistant roof.  This roof also helps to keep the seed dry and protected from weather elements.

This anti squirrel bird feeder comes with a 15 pound seed capacity to keep refills to a minimum.  In addition, it comes with a metal hangar and a 5 foot pole, so you can choose how you would like to display the feeder.

Finally, the Heritage Farms Woodlink Absolute Squirrel Resistant Bird Feeder measures 13.5 inches long, 16 inches wide and 11.2 inches tall.  It weighs approximately 12 pounds.

Pros:

This squirrel proof bird feeder is very well constructed and made with ultra durable materials.

In addition, this feeder has customers raving about how squirrel proof it is.

Cons:

A few consumers have stated that the 5 foot mounting pole is rather short which deters birds from feasting.

 

best portable charcoal grill

Best Portable Charcoal Grill and Propane Grill

So, you’re on the hunt for the best portable charcoal grill or propane grill for the ultimate summer excursions.  Well, there are a few things to look out for when purchasing the best portable charcoal grill or propane grill – and we’ll take you through the ins and outs of finding the right grill for you.

The first step into purchasing the best charcoal or propane grill is to decide if you’re going to want to go with charcoal or propane.  And, there’s really no clear winner between the two, however, there may be personal preferences that will help you through this decision-making process.  

What’s the Difference Between a Charcoal and a Propane Grill?

Let’s start with taste and texture.  Charcoal grills get much hotter than gas grills, therefore, you will see some serious searing action with a charcoal grill.  So, if you’re looking for a crunchy outer texture, charcoal grill hands-down.

In addition, charcoal grills produce more smoke and this smoke transfers flavor.  According to AmazingRibs.com, with charcoal, you will be burning more complex organic molecules which will give you a broader range of flavor compared to a propane grill.

This is not to say that you won’t be grilling some delicious hamburgers on a propane grill.  Quite the opposite, in fact.  However, if you’re looking for that outdoorsy, smoke-infused taste, a charcoal grill is the way to go.

best portable charcoal grill

As far as convenience goes, propane grills seem to win this battle.  Propane grills light with a flick of switch or a turn of a knob while charcoal grills take a lot more effort.  And, propane grills will reach desired heat at approximately 10 minutes while charcoal grills reach desired heat at approximately 20 minutes.

When it comes to cleanup, charcoal grills are far more messy because you have the ash to deal with.  So, a propane grill wins the clean-up convenience factor.

Finally, decide if you will be grilling year round.  Propane grills are the clear winner for every season while charcoal grills are more difficult to light in the colder months.  And, sometimes it’s too cold or too windy to get them to light at all.

So, hopefully you’ve been able to come to some sort of conclusion on which type of grill is going to work best for you.  And, if you haven’t, maybe just taking a browse through our picks for best portable charcoal grill and best portable propane grill will help you on your way – whether it be a portability factor or even the aesthetic of a grill that catches your eye.  

 

Best Portable Charcoal Grill and Propane Grill

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill
Weber
51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill
Propane
Porcelain-Enameled
Cast Iron
Cast Aluminum
Split Grates
Side Trays
Disposable Drip Tray
Color Options
20.5" x 40.9" x 24.6"
Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill
Weber
10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill
Charcoal
Porcelain-Enameled
Plated Steel
Heavy-Gauge Steel
Ash Catcher
15.6" x 15.6" x 9"
Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE
Coleman
Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE
Propane
Porcelain-Coated
Cast Iron
Split Grates
Side Trays
Removable Grease Tray
Lift and Lock System
Color Options
33.8" x 13.5" x 19.1"
Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill
Gourmia
GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill
Charcoal
Battery-Operated
Non-Stick Grill Plate
Turbo Fan
Removable Drip Pan
Carrying Case
14" x 13.5" x 8"
Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill
Pinty
Portable Folding Charcoal Grill
Charcoal
Porcelain-Enameled
Carbon Steel
Silicone Handles
Ash Catcher
22" x 15.7" x 15.4"
Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill
Char-Griller
2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill
Charcoal
Cast Iron
Heavy Steel
Removable Ash Pan
Smoker Option
18.5" x 16" x 17"

 

Best Portable Charcoal Grill and Propane Grill

Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill

Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill

Our first pick for best portable propane grill comes from one of the top outdoor grill companies around.  Weber was established around 1952 with the invention of the kettle grill.  Since then, Weber has become a household name due to innovation and quality and their name is synonymous with grilling.

The Weber 51010001 Q1200 Liquid Propane Grill is built of porcelain-enameled cast iron with a cast aluminum lid and body.  And, according to Crown Variety, the benefit to grilling with cast iron is the cast iron will retain a large amount of heat.  Furthermore, because the cast iron is coated in porcelain, this means it will protect the cast iron from erosion and rust, extending the life of the grill.

In addition, cast iron is known to clean up quickly and easily.  And, along with the disposable and replaceable drip trays, this is one of the easiest propane grills to clean.

The Weber Liquid Propane Grill lights up instantly and is reliable in just about all-weather conditions.  Once lit, you can then adjust the control burner valve to any temperature from low to high.

And, with this pick for best portable propane grill, you get the luxury of split grates.  Split grates are two separate grates that, when put together, become one.  Furthermore, when purchased separately, you can add a griddle grate for cooking items such as scrambled eggs, hash browns and paninis.

The Weber Liquid Propane Grill is lightweight and folds up easily for portability.  And, it comes with side trays that fold up over the grill when not in use.

This portable grill is the perfect size for transporting and the perfect size for a small balcony.  So, if you’re looking for a grill that works just as well at home as it does on the road, this pick is superb.

Finally, the measurements of this grill completely expanded with the lid open and the side tables out is 24.6 inches tall, 40.9 inches wide and 20.5 inches deep.  With the lid closed and the tables out, this grill measures 15.5 inches tall, 40.9 inches wide and 16.5 inches deep.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  Fuchsia, Black, Blue, Green, Orange, Purple, Red, Titanium or Florida State Maroon.

Pros:

This pick for best portable propane grill is the perfect size for taking it on the road or using on a small porch or balcony.  And, to make matters even better, if you have a standing grill in mind, you can add-on this portable cart.

Furthermore, the Weber Liquid Propane Grill lights easily and heats up quickly.  And, while cooking, this grill retains an even cooking temperature throughout, including an even cooking surface.  Once grilling is done, cleanup is a cinch.

Cons:

There’s not much negative to be said about this grill.  It cooks flawlessly, heats up reliably and folds up nicely.  However, one small flaw prevents this grill from being a ten.  The regulator is located next to one of the handles, which makes it rather awkward and difficult to carry.

Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill

Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill

This pick for best portable charcoal grill is a classic and an all-time favorite.  And, according to the Weber Kettle Club, the Weber Smokey Joe Grill was first introduced in 1955, and was Weber’s first portable, tabletop grill.  Furthermore, it has kept the same basic design for over half a century.

The Weber 10020 Smokey Joe 14-Inch Portable Grill features a plated steel cooking grate and a heavy-gauge steel charcoal grate.  The plated steel cooking grate is durable and easy to clean.  Furthermore, the plated steel cooking grate has the ability to produce some serious sear marks.

In addition, this portable grill features a porcelain-enameled bowl and lid.  This will help to prevent rust and will enable heat to transfer evenly.

To keep things clean, the Weber Smokey Joe comes with an aluminum ash catcher.  Once the ash catcher is full, simply scoop the ash out and you’re ready for another round of grilling.

This pick for best portable grill measures roughly 12 inches tall and 15.6 inches in diameter.  The cooking grate measures 14.5 inches in diameter, enough to fit 3 steaks or 6 burgers at a time.  However, if you’re looking for something a bit larger in size, you can always go with the 18-inch model, which you can find here.

Finally, this portable grill transports easily.  Simply place the lid on the grill and latch it shut.  And, if you think things may get a little messy in the process, Weber offers a handy carrying bag which you can conveniently strap over your shoulder.

Pros:

Weber makes quality products and this Smokey Joe Portable Grill is just another one of their reliable products they offer.

So, if you’re looking for a basic, no-frills grill, this pick is most likely your best bet.  Plus, the price is right.

Cons:

This grill is lacking handles.  And, for the life of us, we can’t figure out why something so simple and convenient was left out of the design.  However, you can always carry a pair of gloves with this grill to help protect your hands and maneuver it if you must.

Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE

Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE

We are in love with this design.  This is as close to the look and feel of an outdoor home grill.  The Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill LXE is a collapsible grill that will fit in most trunks.  And, it features a lift and lock system which allows for set up within seconds.

This pick for best portable propane grill offers 2 porcelain-coated cast iron grilling plates.  These plates are easy to clean and will last for a very long time.  And, according to Grill Beast, cast iron is extremely efficient at retaining heat for long periods of time.  Furthermore, the sear marks cast iron produces are to die for.

And with these grill plates, they can be interchangeable with a griddle plate for scrambled eggs or whatever your heart desires.

The Coleman Road Trip Propane Portable Grill offers a lot of cooking power with 10,000 BTUs for each burner.  BTU, or British Thermal Unit, is a unit of measure given off by a gas burner.  For instance, a home stove has around 7,000 BTUs per burner.  So, 10,000 BTUs is a seriously good amount of heat for some grilling.

This portable grill features an Instastart Button which will enable you to light the grill without a lighter.  And, once lit, this grill can run for an hour on one of the 16.4 ounce propane cylinders.

Other features of the Coleman Road Trip Grill is a removable grease tray for easy cleanup and the convenient sliding side tables.

Finally, this grill measures 33.8 inches long, 13.5 inches wide, 19.1 inches tall and weighs roughly 50 pounds.  And, you get your choice of color:  Black, Blue, Green, Maroon, Orange, Purple, Red or Silver.

Pros:

The portability of this grill, while having the appearance of a regular-sized grill, is unheard of.  And, when speaking of the portability, did we bring attention to the wheels?

Furthermore, the setup of this grill is literally in seconds.  No hassle, no fuss, it just props right up.

Cons:

Because this grill has cast iron grilling plates, it’s going to take a lot longer to clean than grills with steel grates.  

Another con to this grill, it is rather heavy at 50 pounds.  Just make sure you have the manpower to transport this to and from the trunk.

Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill

Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill

This pick for best portable charcoal grill is an electric pick, looks-wise and function-wise.  The Gourmia BGQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill is battery and coal-operated.  Simply place the charcoal in the small charcoal box, light the ignition and adjust the Smart Turbo Fan to control the strength of the flame.

This Smart Turbo Fan is a fabulous addition.  Not only does it control the strength of the flame, it also controls the airflow.  This allows for minimal charcoal and minimal smoke output.

The Gourmia GBQ330 Portable Charcoal Electric BBQ Grill features a non stick grill plate that is easy to clean.  In addition, this electric charcoal grill comes with a double grill pan system that helps eliminates drip.  Furthermore, it has a removable drip pan and all the electronic elements are removable for the convenience of cleaning.

Lastly, this pick for best portable charcoal grill has a circumference of 37.39 inches with an 11.90 inch grilling surface.  And, it comes with a travel case with a shoulder strap for easy portability.

Pros:

The cleanup process of this grill is flawless.  You can easily get to every crease and crevice without much hassle.

In addition, this grill is extremely efficient and doesn’t burn much charcoal, making it cost-effective.

Cons:

The grill plate is on the thin side and can bend rather easily.

Furthermore, some consumers say the heat does not distribute evenly and tends to focus on the center of the grill.

 

Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill

Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill

If you’re looking to grill for a group of people and still want the portability factor, this pick for best portable charcoal grill is one to consider.  The Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill features 250 square inches of grill space which can accommodate anywhere from 5 to 7 people.  And, 250 square inches comes out to 18.5 inches wide by 13.5 inches deep of grill space.

This charcoal grill is made of carbon steel with a dust proof surface.  Carbon steel is known for its durability and strength.  In addition, the Pinty Portable Folding Charcoal Grill comes with porcelain-enameled grates which will help protect the grilling surface from rust while being easy to clean.  And, to protect your extremities, this grill comes with heat-resistant silicone handles.

This pick for best portable charcoal grill comes with 7 air vents for dust and ash discharge and will create the ultimate ventilation.  It also comes equipped with an ash catcher underneath the grilling grates.  And, to remove the ash, you simply remove the grates and turn the grill upside down.

Finally, even though this grill can accommodate a group of people, it is still highly portable.  With the legs expanded, this grill measures 22 inches long, 15.7 inches wide and 15.4 inches tall.  It’s fully foldable so the legs can tuck underneath the grill.  And, you can carry it away by one of the silicone handles.

Pros:

This is one sturdy little grill.  And, we’re not sure if we should be calling it little as it can feed a family at once.

So, with this pick for best portable charcoal grill, you’re getting the best of three worlds:  Durability, portability and a large grilling space.

Cons:

While this grill is made with carbon steel, some consumers felt it wasn’t as heavy-duty as they thought it would be.

 

Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill

Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill

Our final pick for best portable charcoal grill can also be used as a Texas-style smoker.  However, once you use this as a smoker, you cannot go back to using it as a grill.  

The Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill is constructed of heavy steel with cast iron cooking grates.  So, you’re looking at durability all around.  And, with the cast iron cooking grates, you’re looking at some seriously fabulous grilled foods.  In addition, like we mentioned before, cast iron cleans up easily and quickly.

This portable charcoal grill is another pick that offers a large amount of grilling space.  The cooking grates have 250 square inches of real estate, enough to feed anywhere from 5 to 7 people.

A couple of other features include a removable ash pan for easy and convenient cleanup and a Stay Cool handle to protect your extremities from heat.

For portability purposes, what you see is what you get.  Just pick it up and go.  The Char-Griller 2-2424 Table Top Charcoal Grill measures 18.5 inches long, 16 inches wide and 17 inches tall.  It weighs approximately 41 pounds.

Pros:

This pick for best portable charcoal grill is well-constructed and made with some of the most durable materials available.  From the cast iron cooking grates to the heavy steel construction, you may be looking at a grill for a lifetime.

Furthermore, if you ever want to try your hand at some smoked fish or sausage, this grill would be your opportunity.  However, just remember you can’t go back to using this as a regular grill once you use it as a smoker.

Cons:

Some consumers have had issues with the paint coming off after the first couple of uses.  But, it’s important to note that some consumers haven’t had any issues.

best l shaped desk

Best L Shaped Desk for the Home or Office

If you’re on the hunt for the best L shaped desk for the home or office, we found 6 aesthetically pleasing desks that are durable and made with absolute quality.

In addition, these desks come in a range of prices to meet every consumer’s needs.  Therefore, if you’re on the lower end of the budget, we found the best L shaped desk that, in our opinion, looks the best – while being able to stand the test of time.  If you’re on the higher end of the budget, we found the best L shaped desks that are built with top quality materials, and will, not only look fabulous, but feel fabulous.

So, besides meeting your budget and aesthetic, what else should you look for in the best L shaped desk?

Under the assumption this desk will be used for work, the desk should draw inspiration.  This can happen a couple of different ways.  You can choose a desk that is designed in such a way that is pleasing to the eye or you can choose a desk that is so minimal, your work will be the focal point.

best l shaped desk

Therefore, a good question to ask yourself is, when you look at your desk, what do you want to see?  Do you want your work to stand out or your surroundings to stand out?  For some people, the work they do is aesthetically pleasing in nature, and these consumers tend to go with a simple design so as to not take away from their work.  Others, on the other hand, have more data driven work and these consumers tend to go with a more aesthetically pleasing desk.

Next, consider how much storage space you will need.  Do you need a filing cabinet?  How about a keyboard pullout?  Or, perhaps everything is stored on your computer and you just need extra counter space for a printer and a lamp.

Finally, be sure to take measurements.  The last thing you want to do is buy a desk and have to return it because the darn thing won’t fit.  And, with L shaped desks, pay close attention to if the L is on the right or the left of the desk.  Having the L shape on the wrong side can result in an annoying return.

So, once you have your needs all figured out, you’re ready to narrow down your options.  And, our picks for the best L shape desk should propel you on your way.

 

Best L Shaped Desk

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk
Ashley Furniture Signature Design
Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk
Wood
Manmade Wood
Veneer
L/R Arrangement
60" x 56" x 30"
Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2
Sauder
Costa L-Desk Chc A2
Engineered Wood
Veneer
3 Drawers
Filing Rails
Keyboard Shelf
Grommet Holes
65.12" x 65.12" x 30"
DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk
DECHO DESIGN
Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk
MDF Board
Steel Frame
Color Options
56" x 56" x 20.5"
Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk
Simpli Home
Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk
Pine
Keyboard Shelf
Color Options
84" x 80" x 30"
Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk
Sauder
420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk
Engineered Wood
Veneer
4 Drawers
Filing Rails
Keyboard Shelf
Grommet Holes
68.7" x 65.1" x 29.6"
Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk
Merax
59-Inch L-Shaped Desk
MDF Board
Steel Frame
Color Options
59" x 55" x 29.9"

 

Best L Shaped Desk

Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk

Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk

Simple, unassuming and a great fit for a traditional, classic, industrial or modern space.  And, actually, the simplicity of the Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Home Office Desk can work with just about every aesthetic.

This pick for best L shaped desk measures 60 inches wide, 30 inches tall and 56 inches in diameter.  In addition, as an added bonus, this desk can be arranged on the left or right hand side.

The Ashley Furniture Signature Design Lobink L-Shaped Desk is made of wood, manmade wood and veneer.  And, it is made extremely sturdy which is crucial for those heavier items, such as a TV or a printer.  In addition, because it is made extremely sturdy, this desk will last for years to come.  And, of course, through all of that abuse work puts us through.

Finally, the assembly required is fairly easy.  However, it is a whole lot easier with 2 people on the task.

Pros:

This L shaped desk is very well made and sturdy.  This means there’s no wobble and the desk is made to handle heavier items.  

Furthermore, it is made with a quality hand-applied wood finish.  This will help protect it against scratches and stains.

Cons:

There’s not many cons to this desk.  The price is extremely gracious for what you get.  However, a few consumers have stated that assembly wasn’t that easy.  And, a couple of consumers didn’t receive the necessary tools to assemble the desk.

 

Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2

Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2

This L shaped, corner desk is great for elegant, classic and/or country decor.  The Sauder Costa L-Desk Chc A2 is also great for those who need extra storage.  This L shaped desk features 3 drawers, a keyboard shelf and filing rails.  And, the keyboard shelf can be assembled on either side of the L shape.

Furthermore, the bottom of the desk features a storage area with an adjustable shelf.  This adjustable shelf is perfect for storing a modem, speakers and/or a computer tower.  And, as an added feature, the top of the desk comes with grommet holes that will help manage cords and keep the desk free of cord clutter. 

The Sauder Costa L-Desk is made with engineered wood and thick-grained veneer, topped with a chalked chestnut finish.  And, this desk is finished on all sides so you’re not stuck propping it against the wall.

Finally, this L shaped corner desk measures 65.12 inches wide, 30 inches tall and 65.12 inches in diameter.  While the depth of the desk is 23.25 inches deep.

Pros:

The Sauder Costa L-Desk is extremely well made with sturdy construction. 

And, this desk offers plenty of storage.  But, if you’re looking for more storage or a whole office set, you can find the matching hut here, the matching file cabinet here and the matching chest here.

Cons:

Although this desk is easy to assemble, it does take awhile.  With some consumers estimating around 4 hours.

 

DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk

DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk

Our next pick for best L shaped desk for the home or office is perfect for modern spaces.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  Oak and White Leg or Walnut and Black Leg.

In addition, because it is modern a modern design, it doesn’t offer much storage.  However, if you need extra storage, you can always add in a roll away filing cabinet like pictured above.  You can find the one DECHO DESIGN makes here or you can spice it up with some of these.

The DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk measures 20.5 inches wide, 29.93 inches tall and 56 inches in diameter.  Furthermore, it is constructed of MDF board with a thick steel frame.  And, this desk has a capacity to hold 300 lbs.  So, feel free to stack your monitors on top.

Finally, this desk is easy to assemble and come with instructions and tools to help get the job done.

Pros:

The DECHO DESIGN Modern L-Shaped Corner Computer Desk is strong and sturdy.  And, the design is great for minimal and modern spaces.

In addition, if you’re looking for a space-saving pick, this one’s a great fit.

Cons:

If you’re looking for the real deal, AKA wood, you may want to go with another pick.  This is made with MDF board, which is medium-density fiberboard.  And, although it is sturdy, many people crave the aesthetic of real wood.

Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk

Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk

This pick for best L shaped desk is one of our favorites and we can’t help but see ourselves completely in our element with this one.

The Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk is constructed in the classic sawhorse style with solid pine.  This solid pine is finished with a medium Saddle Brown stain and a NC Lacquer to protect the wood from scratches and stains.  You also have your pick of colors:  Saddle Brown, Dark Chestnut Brown or Distressed Grey.

This L shaped desk doesn’t come with storage so it’s great for those who are minimalists at work.  However, it does come with a built-in keyboard tray to help further keep things to a minimum.

This desk comes in three main pieces:  desk, corner piece and thick side desk.  The desk measures 60 inches long, 30 inches tall and 24 inches deep.  The corner piece measures 24 inches long and 24 inches deep, while the thick side desk measures 56 inches long, 30 inches tall and 24 inches deep.  With all that said, this is a fairly large desk so it’s great for those that like to spread out.

Pros:

The Simpli Home Sawhorse Solid Wood L-Shape Corner Desk is handcrafted and made with solid pine.  Need we say more?  Yes indeed!  This desk is absolutely stunning.

In addition, the assembly of this desk is easy.  The directions are straight-forward and clear and the hardware is clearly marked.

Cons:

Pine is softer than other woods and it tends to dent more easily.  Some people will purchase pine just for this fact, while others like to keep their wood looking brand new.  If you’re the type that likes their wood looking fresh, you can always invest in some desk pads for protection.

 

Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk

Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk

This pick is for someone looking for much-needed storage.  The Sauder 420606 Palladia L-Desk Vo A2 Computer Desk features 4 drawers, with one drawer set up for hanging files.  In addition, this L shaped desk comes with a shelf drawer for a keyboard and hidden storage which has an adjustable shelf.  This shelf is perfect for a computer tower, modem and/or speakers.

Furthermore, the top of the desk has grommet cords to keep the desk free of cord clutter. 

This traditional-style L shaped desk is made of engineered wood.  More specifically, it is made of high-quality hardwood and softwood residuals.  It is then bonded with synthetic resin and topped with a Vintage Oak laminate finish.

The Sauder Palladia L-Desk measures roughly 68.7 inches long on each side and 29.5 inches tall.

Pros:

This is one solid piece of furniture.  And, it weighs a whopping 271 pounds.  So, you can be rest assured that this table is going to hold the heavier pieces of equipment and then some.

Cons:

Although assembly is fairly easy, it’s going to take some time to put together.  Most consumers estimate between 4 and 6 hours.

However, once this desk is put together, it’s well worth it.

Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk

Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk

Our last pick for best L shaped desk is as minimal as you can get – price-wise and style-wise.  The Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk is so unassuming, it will fit with just about any decor.

This L shaped desk is made with MDF with powder-coated steel legs.  The MDF is scratch resistant and cleans up easily while the durable, steel cantilever legs help keep the desk stable.

The Merax 59-Inch L-Shaped Desk measures 59 inches wide, 55 inches deep and 29.9 inches tall.  And, if you like this desk but you’re not so enthralled with the color, you can find different color schemes here and here.

Pros:

If you’re on a super-duper budget, this is a great pick.  It’s strong and will hold heavier equipment.

Furthermore, because it’s modern and unassuming, it’s going to look good in any space.

Lastly, most consumers agree, this desk is easy to assemble.

Cons:

Although this desk is strong, it is iffy in the sturdy department.  And, when we say sturdy, we mean wobble.  A couple of consumers have stated that it wobbles slightly when used on carpet.  So, perhaps your floor dressing is something to take into account before purchase.

best coffee maker with grinder

Best Coffee Maker with Grinder – Top 4 Programmable Picks

There’s nothing better than fresh ground coffee and fresh brewed coffee – except for the best coffee maker with grinder.  And, this is a device where you can have both nearly simultaneously.

So, what are the advantages of having a coffee maker with grinder?  First off, like we mentioned above, you get fresh ground and fresh brewed coffee back to back.  So, if you thought the smell of coffee brewing was heavenly before, this just makes it all smell a whole lot richer.

Next, there isn’t one person who would love to save on cupboard space and counter space.  And, when you have a separate grinder and a separate coffee maker, things get a little clunky and cluttered.  Therefore, the best coffee maker with grinder will save you precious room in the kitchen.

Another added bonus of having a 2-in-1 coffee maker and grinder is less mess.  We all know from grinding coffee in a separate grinder, things tend to get messy.  With a coffee maker and grinder, the grounds go directly from the grinder into the filter.  So, say goodbye to grounds spilling onto the countertop.

Finally, and perhaps best of all, our picks for best coffee maker with grinder are all programmable.  This means they will grind and brew the coffee while you’re working on getting out of bed.  And, there’s nothing like waking up to the smell of fresh ground and brewed coffee.

 

Best Coffee Maker with Grinder

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Capresso 464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder
Capresso
464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
Strength Settings
Fineness Settings
Conical Burr Grinder
Drip Stop
Charcoal Water Filter
Gold Tone Filter
Safety Shutoff
9.2" x 9.2" x 15.2"
Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Cuisinart
DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
2 Blade Grinder
Brew Pause
Double-Wall Carafe
Charcoal Water Filter
Gold Tone Filter
Auto Shutoff
9.8" x 12" x 17.5"
BLACK+DECKER 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B
BLACK+DECKER
12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
Strength Settings
2 Blade Grinder
Brew Pause
Bronze Tone Filter
Auto Shutoff
10" x 13.5" x 15.5"
Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Cuisinart
DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker
Programmable
Automatic Grind/Brew
Strength Settings
Burr Grinder
Brew Pause
Double-Wall Carafe
Charcoal Water Filter
Gold Tone Filter
Auto Shutoff
7.9" x 12.7" x 15.9"

 

Best Coffee Maker with Grinder

 

Capresso 464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder

Capresso 464.05 CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder

Our first pick for best coffee maker with grinder will brew up to 10 cups of coffee at a time.  And, it will grind enough beans for up to 20 cups of coffee before you will need to refill the 6 ounce bean bin.

The Capresso CoffeeTeam GS Digital Coffeemaker with Concial Burr Grinder is programmable so you can wake up smelling the day ahead of you.  With the programmable settings, you can choose between 2 to 10 cups of coffee at a mild, regular or strong setting.  In addition, this coffee maker offers 5 fineness settings to grind the beans according to the darkness or the lightness of the bean.  So, for darker beans, you can program the grinder for a coarser grind.  And, with a lighter bean, you can program the grinder for a finer grind.

Furthermore, these settings are all programmable by a 24-hour clock.  This clock is displayed on an LCD screen which also displays the grind and strength settings.

So, what if you don’t want to use the programmable settings?  No worries, this coffee maker will also work manually.

Now, what happens if you’re up and ready to go before the coffee gets done brewing?  Well, this coffee maker with grinder has a drip stop so you can pour your coffee in the middle of the process without worrying about making a mess.  Then, just place the coffee pot back on the burner and the brewing will resume.

This coffee maker with grinder also features direct-feed technology.  Direct-feed technology is where the grinder feeds the beans right into the filter, so you don’t have to worry about anything except for pouring your morning cup of coffee.     

The Capresso CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker features a solid steel concial burr grinder.  According to Kitchn, a conical burr grinder will grind your beans in a uniform size.  And, since this is a slow grinding concial burr grinder, it will increase the aroma of the coffee.  Furthermore, according to Whole Latte Love, the slow grinding conical burr grinder is the “Cadillac” of grinders.  So, coming from the coffee specialists themselves, this is the best grinder money can buy.

The next question is, what if you want to use pre-ground coffee?  This coffee maker will work with or without the grinder, so feel free to grind or not to grind.

And, for a few other notable features, the Capresso CoffeeTeam GS 10-Cup Digital Coffeemaker comes equipped with a charcoal water filter.  This charcoal water filter will remove up to 82% of chlorine, sediment and odor from the water.

Furthermore, this coffee maker with grinder features a 2-hour safety shutoff to preserve energy and to keep your surroundings safe.

Finally, this pick for best coffee maker with grinder comes with your choice of a glass carafe or a stainless steel carafe.

Pros:

The Capresso CoffeeTeam GS Digital Coffeemaker is extremely well made and a quality product.  Furthermore, it has endless features from the charcoal water filter to the 3 strength settings to the 5 fineness settings.  And, it is completely programmable, so you don’t have to worry about a thing when waking up.

Another added bonus with this coffee maker with grinder is it comes with a conical burr grinder.  This grinder is the grinder used by coffee snobs and connoisseurs alike.  So, you’re going to have some of the best smelling and best tasting coffee money can brew.

Cons:

A few consumers have complained about how long this grinder takes to grind.  In addition, they also stated that this grinder is rather loud.  So, if you’re a light sleeper, you may want to venture with another option on our list.

Furthermore, once you have filled the bean bin with whole beans, they are there to stay.  So, if you’re looking to change to a different blend, you need to go through the grinding process in order to rid of the unused beans.  However, this grinder has the capacity for approximately 2 pots of brewed coffee, so it’s not the biggest downfall in the world of brewing coffee.

 

Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

This pick for best coffee maker with grinder is another one with a 10 cup brew capacity.  And, the grinder bin has the capacity to grind enough beans for a full pot of coffee.

The Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal 10-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker is completely programmable.  These programmable settings include a 1-4 cup brewing option, a brew-pause and a grind-off.  The brew-pause function allows you to pour the coffee while it’s brewing.  This will enable the spout to shut off until you place the carafe back on the burner.  Additionally, the grind-off function will allow you to use pre-ground coffee.

Furthermore, these settings can all be programmed 24 hours in advance to ensure you wake up to the smell of coffee.  And, there is a large control panel with an LED display to adjust these settings.

The Cuisinart DGB-650BC Grind-and-Brew Thermal Automatic Coffeemaker features a 2 blade grinder.  According to the Coffee Detective and other coffee professionals, the better option for a grinder is a burr grinder.  With a 2 blade grinder, there is inconsistency with the size of the grind which can clog the machine.  However, the 2 blade grinder is less expensive than a burr grinder.

Furthermore, with this 2 blade grinder, it is preset to brew medium strength coffee.  So, be sure you choose your coffee blends accordingly.  If you prefer dark-brewed coffee, we suggest going with a darker blend.  If you prefer light-brewed coffee, we suggest going with the lightest blend possible.  Or, you can choose any blend you want and just add less beans.

The Cuisinart DBG-650BC Grind-and-Brew Coffeemaker will automatically grind the beans before brewing.  So, while you’re waking up, the grind process will already be in effect for your much-awaited first cup of coffee.

This coffee maker with grinder comes with a double-wall thermal carafe which will keep the coffee hotter for longer.  And, this carafe features a stay-cool handle and a drip-free spout.

Additional features of this coffee maker with grinder include a charcoal water filter and a gold tone filter.  The charcoal water filter will eliminate most contaminants from the water and will remove odor, making way for an even more delicious cup of coffee.

Finally, the Cuisinart Grind-and-Brew is made in such a way that all materials which come in contact with the water, coffee and coffee beans are BPA free.

Pros:

Consumers find this coffee maker with grinder easy to use.  And, furthermore, it is easy to clean.

In addition, the thermal double-wall coffee pot is an industrial-style pot which is great for keeping the coffee hotter for longer.  

Cons:

This coffee maker comes with a 2 blade grinder as opposed to a burr grinder.  A burr grinder is definitely the far better grinder for better tasting coffee.  However, if you are interested in this Cuisinart but prefer a burr grinder, you’re in luck.  Our last pick for best coffeemaker with grinder is a Cuisinart with a burr grinder.

Lastly, this coffeemaker doesn’t have an adjustable grinder.  So, you will need to work around the medium-strength brew preset by following our examples above.

BLACK+DECKER 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B

BLACK+DECKER 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B

This pick for best coffeemaker with grinder comes with a 12 cup brew capacity carafe.  And, the grinder bin also allows for a 12 cup brew capacity.  So, you will need to fill the grinder bin with fresh beans before each brew.

The Black & Decker 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker CM5000B features 24-hour programming with multiple settings.  These settings include brew strength, grind-off, small-brew, and of course, grinding and brewing at your desired time.  The brew strength setting allows you to set the option for regular, bold or strong coffee.  The grind-off setting allows you to shut off the grinder so you can use ground coffee.  And, the small-brew setting will allow you to make a smaller pot of coffee for those energy-fueled days.

These settings are all programmable on a large control panel with a backlight display.  This backlight display will highlight the settings and the time.

This coffeemaker with grinder comes with a 2 blade grinder.  And, like we stated above, a 2 blade grinder isn’t necessarily the grinder the professionals use.  It will grind and it will allow for great tasting brewed coffee.  However, because of the way it erratically grinds the coffee, it has a tendency to clog after a while.

The Black & Decker 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker comes with a couple more notable features.  These features include a permanent bronze filter, a brew-stop function and an automatic-off function.  The brew-stop function will allow you to pour a cup of coffee mid-brew without making a mess.  And, the automatic-off function will shut off the heat to preserve energy and prevent a disaster.

Finally, this coffee maker with grinder comes in your choice of colors:  Black, Black/White, Red or White.

Pros:

For having a 2 blade grinder, this machine grounds the coffee reasonably fine.  Therefore, you may be able to avoid clogging issues for longer with this pick.

Furthermore, the grinder is fairly quiet.  And, if you’re a light sleeper, you’re going to love this aspect.

Cons:

There is no water filter with the Black & Decker 12-Cup Mill and Brew Coffeemaker.  However, to achieve the best tasting coffee, you can fill the water tank up with pre-filtered water.

In addition, there is no reservoir for the beans.  So, you will have to fill this bin each time before programming it to brew at your desired time.

 

Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker

Our grand finale for best coffee maker with grinder is a 12 cup capacity coffee maker with an 8 ounce bean bin.  This bean bin will hold a half a pound of beans which will allow you to grind and brew approximately 4 pots of coffee.

The Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker is fully programmable.  These programmable settings include automatic grind, automatic brew, automatic shutoff, brew-pause and grind-off.  The automatic shutoff will shut down the coffee maker to preserve energy and keep your surroundings safe.  The brew-pause setting will allow you to pour yourself a cup of coffee mid-brew without making a mess.  And, the grind-off setting will allow you to use pre-ground coffee.

Furthermore, there is a strength setting and a grind control.  With the strength setting, you can set the strength of your coffee to mild, medium or strong.  And, with the grind control, you can grind enough coffee for 2 to 12 cups.  In addition, there is a feature where you’re able to brew between 2 and 4 cups of coffee.

The Cuisinart DGB-900BC Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker features a burr grinder.  And, like we stated above, a burr grinder is the choice of coffee professionals and coffee connoisseurs alike.  A burr grinder will grind the beans in a uniform size, which helps to prevent clogging.  In addition, a burr grinder produces better tasting and better smelling coffee.  And, we’re pretty sure we can all wake up to that.

This coffee maker with grinder comes with a charcoal water filter.  This charcoal water filter will remove most of the contaminates in the water and will help to eliminate odor.  And, eliminating odor will help to achieve the ultimate fresh brewed coffee.

The Cuisinart Grind & Brew Thermal 12-Cup Automatic Coffeemaker comes with a double-wall insulated stainless steel thermal carafe and features a comfort grip handle.  This double-wall thermal carafe will help to keep the coffee hotter for longer.

Finally, this pick for best coffee maker with grinder is BPA free.

Pros:

This coffee maker is fairly quiet which is great for the light sleepers out there.

In addition, the Cuisinart Grind & Brew 12-Cup Coffeemaker features a burr grinder for better tasting and better smelling coffee.  And, it helps to keep things from getting clogged.

Another aspect consumers love about this coffeemaker is it is very easy to operate.

Cons:

With this pick for best coffee maker with grinder, there is no fineness settings for coarseness.  If you’re looking for a coffeemaker with grinder comparable to this model that has these settings, you may want to check out the first option on our list.

Furthermore, this coffeemaker requires quite a bit of daily cleaning.  However, some consumers say for such great tasting coffee, it’s well worth it.

 

best seat cushion for lower back pain

Best Seat Cushion for Lower Back Pain

Because we suffer from lumbar, coccyx, sciatica and hip issues, we found ourselves in need of the best seat cushion for lower back pain.  And, we also needed a cushion that was going to improve our posture, which in the long run, will help our back and hip issues over time.

So, when we began this assignment, the seat cushion we were using at the time had flattened out like a pancake and we were in desperate need before our back and hip issues became worse.  Therefore, our pancake seat cushion gave us our first requirement for finding the best seat cushion.  The cushion had to hold up through long hours of sitting day in and day out.  So, durability and longevity was one of our main focal points.

Our other main focal point was, of course, finding the best seat cushion to help alleviate our wide range of issues.  Like we stated previously, sciatic nerve pain, anterior pelvic tilt, pelvic floor pain, lower back pain and a fractured coccyx.  Trust us, all of this together is not fun.  And, that’s why finding the best seat cushion for us is all that more dire.

So, with our final picks, we needed relief.  And, we made sure these picks will not only help us with our wide-range of issues, they will help us for months to come.

 

Best Seat Cushion for Lower Back Pain

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion
Everlasting Comfort
100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion
Memory Foam
Non-Slip Gel Rubber Bottom
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Leg Support
17.5" x 13.5" x 2.8"
Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge
Easy Posture
Dr. Tushy Wedge
Memory Foam
EZ Snap Elastic Straps
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Leg Support
14" x 14" x 3"
Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion
Kieba
Coccyx Seat Cushion
Memory Foam
Gel Technology
Non-Slip Bottom
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Leg Support
14" x 18" x 3"
Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion
Ergonomic Innovations
Donut Tailbone Cushion
Medical Foam
Non-Slip Bottom
Center Coccyx Cutout
17.5" x 14" x 2.5"
Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow
Soft & Care
Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow
Memory Foam
Non-Slip Bottom
U-Shaped Coccyx Cutout
Back Support
Adjustable Straps
18” x 14” x 3”

 

Best Seat Cushion for Lower Back Pain

Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion

Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion

Our first pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is made of 100% memory foam.  So, this will mold to your tush and relieve pressure that often comes with sitting on hard surfaces.

The Everlasting Comfort 100% Pure Memory Foam Luxury Seat Cushion is used to relieve numerous back conditions.  These conditions include sciatic nerve pain, arthritis, lower back pain, lumbar pain, coccyx discomfort and hip discomfort.

So, how does a memory foam seat cushion manage to alleviate all of these conditions?  Like we mentioned previously, the memory foam will help relieve pressure by absorbing shock.  Furthermore, this seat cushion features a contoured design to support your legs.  And, it has a U-shaped cutout to take much-needed pressure off of the coccyx.

The Everlasting Comfort Luxury Seat Cushion is heat responsive, which not only helps to form perfectly to your tush, it will also help to relax tight muscles.

Finally, this seat cushion offers a nonslip gel rubber bottom to keep you secure and in proper alignment at all times.

And, there is a weight limit with this cushion.  So, for maximum benefit and longevity of this seat cushion, it is best suited for those weighing between 100 and 300 pounds. 

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is firm, yet comfortable.  In addition, it keeps its form without flattening out over time.

In addition, consumers say it helps them sit upright and prevents them from hunching over.

And, as far as alleviating back and hip conditions, the consensus was overwhelming.  Many consumers who suffer from pain and discomfort related to sciatica and hip, lumbar and coccyx issues reported feeling relief from these particular issues and were able to sit comfortably for longer periods of time.

Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge

Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge

This next pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is made with memory foam and features a soft velour cover.  And, like we mentioned previously, memory foam will help absorb shock and relieve back, hip and coccyx pressure.

The Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge is designed in such a way that it will help to improve posture while alleviating pain associated with hip, lower back and coccyx issues.  And, for those with hip pain, or in our case, anterior pelvic tilt, this cushion will help align your hips to relieve pain that comes with sitting for long periods of time.

This seat cushion features a coccyx cut out to help take complete pressure off of the tailbone.  So, for those that have had a tailbone injury, you can breathe a sigh of relief.

The Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge comes with EZ Snap elastic straps to secure the cushion into place.  And, this is especially helpful while using this seat cushion in the car.

Finally, this seat cushion’s cover is removable and machine washable.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is firm, yet gives a little once it detects the form of the body.  And, once it conforms to the body, it is extremely comfortable.

Furthermore, consumers say this seat cushion helps relieve pressure from the hips and works very well in aligning the spine while relieving lumbar and coccyx pain.

Lastly, most consumers agree, the Easy Posture Dr. Tushy Wedge keeps its shape after months of use.

Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion

Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion

This pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is made of premium memory foam.  Furthermore, this memory foam is layered with gel technology to keep things cool.

The Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion is designed for lumbar, coccyx, hip and sciatic pain and discomfort.  Some other conditions this seat cushion will help comfort is pelvic pain, herniated discs and bed sores.

In addition, this seat cushion will help align the spine and promote correct posture.  And, because this seat cushion offers leg support, it will distribute weight evenly.

The Kieba Coccyx Seat Cushion comes with a non-slip bottom to keep you secure through hours of sitting.  Furthermore, this seat cushion features a removable velour cover that is machine washable.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is firm, yet comfortable.  And, some consumers say it is too firm.  So, if you are looking for a firm seat cushion, this is a great pick for you.  If you like to have a little cushion, you may want to go with another one of our picks.

Furthermore, this seat cushion is wider in size than our other picks.  So, if you need more space for your hips, this is one to consider.

Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion

Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion

For those of you that have tried the U-shaped seat cushions to no avail, this donut-shaped cushion may be the miracle you’ve been looking for.

The Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion is made of high-rebound medical foam.  And, high-rebound medical foam is durable and long-lasting, while being firm, yet comfortable.

This seat cushion can be helpful for numerous conditions.  Some of these conditions include:  lumbar, hip and pelvic pain, coccyx discomfort, hemorrhoids, ulcers, herniated disc, prostate pain and more.  Furthermore, if you suffer from prolonged sitting disorder, this seat cushion will also give you relief.

The Ergonomic Innovations Donut Tailbone Cushion features a center cutout for the coccyx.  In addition, this cutout will relieve pressure to the spine.

Lastly, this donut seat cushion has a nonslip bottom that will help keep you seated securely.  And, it has a removable cover that is machine washable.

What consumers are saying:

Consumers say this seat cushion is very firm.  So, if firm support is what you’re looking for, this is a great pick for you.

Additionally, consumers say this is a quality product and it retains its shape well.

Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow

Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow

Our last pick for best seat cushion for lower back pain is for those who need extra back support.  Furthermore, this pick is especially great for those who have a less than desirable office chair.

The Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam and Lumbar Support Pillow is made of high-density, premium memory foam.  And, like we mentioned earlier, memory foam will absorb shock and take some of the pressure off of the spine, hip and coccyx area.

This seat cushion is great for numerous issues, such as, sciatica, herniated disc, hip pain, pelvic floor pain, lower lumbar pain, pregnancy discomfort and more.  And, because this seat cushion has a coccyx cutout, this will give additional relief for the coccyx and spine area.  Additionally, this seat cushion will help align the spine and promote correct posture.

The Soft & Care Seat Cushion Coccyx Orthopedic Memory Foam Pillow comes with a non-slip bottom to keep you extra secure, while the top cushion features 2 adjustable straps that buckle to keep the cushion in place.  Furthermore, for traveling purposes, this seat cushion comes with a convenient carrying handle and a side pocket for your phone.

Lastly, this seat cushion features breathable mesh to keep things cool and comfortable.  And, the cover is removable and washable.

What consumers are saying:

If you’re looking for softer support, this is a great option for you.  However, users seem to agree, although soft, it’s supportive.  And, more specifically, it offers great lumbar and spine support.

In addition, consumers say the Soft & Care Seat Cushion Memory Foam Support Pillow is quality constructed and durable.  But, consumers say it’s a bit on the small size, especially the seat back.  So, if you’re on the smaller side, this may be a good option for you.  If you’re in need of something bigger, you may want to check out some of our other picks.

 

best space heater for large room

Best Space Heater for Large Room

When looking for the best space heater for large room, it is crucial to find a heater that is efficient.  If you have ever received an electricity bill after trying to keep warm in the winter, it’s not the most pleasant surprise.  So, when we began our search for the best space heater for large room, efficiency was at the top of our list.

Another quality to look for when searching for the best space heater for large room is safety.  Therefore, our final picks all have different safety features to help prevent a disaster.  For instance, one of our picks has tip-over protection while another pick stays cool to the touch.  And, of course, all of our picks come with overheat protection.

In addition, we also had comfort in mind when choosing our final 5 best heaters for a large space.  And, we are not talking about the comfort of heat.  This aspect we already made sure of.  We are talking quiet heat.  So, if the heat is blowing, there will be very little to no white noise.

Finally, we sifted through all the user reviews and made sure each on of our final picks lived up to the expectations of some picky consumers.  And, our final picks have some of the highest-rated reviews and most satisfied consumers on the market.

 

Best Space Heater for Large Room

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Dr Infrared Heater Portable Space Heater
Dr Infrared Heater
Portable Space Heater
PTC/Quartz Infrared Heating
1500 Watt/12.5 Amp
Electronic Thermostat
12 Hour Automatic Shutoff
Tip-Over Protection
Remote Control
13" x 11" x 16"
Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect
Duraflame
DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect
Quartz Infrared Heating
1500 Watt/12.5 Amp
Thermostat
Metal Construction
3-D Flame Effect
Cool Touch
Safer Plug Fire Prevention
Remote Control
Style Options
13.1" x 24" x 23.4"
Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater
Homegear
Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater
Mica/Quartz Infrared Heating
1500 Watts/12.5 Amp
Thermostat
Cool Touch
Overheat Protection
Remote Control
Style Options
12" x 13" x 17"
Cadet RCP402S Space Heater "The Hot One"
Cadet
RCP402S Space Heater "The Hot One"
4000 Watts/20 Amp
Double Pole Thermostat
Fan Only Mode
Mounting Bracket
Overheat Protection
Color Options
Wattage Options
8.2" x 17.5" x 15.8"
Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater
Heat Storm
Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater
HMS Technology Heating
1500 Watt/12.5 Amp
Thermostat
Fan
Overheat Sensor
Remote Control
12.5" x 14.5" x 16"

 

Best Space Heater for Large Room

 

Dr Infrared Heater Portable Space Heater

Dr Infrared Heater Portable Space Heater

Our first pick for best space heater for large room is energy-efficient and will keep a 1,000 square foot space comfortably warm.

And, how does it do this?  The Dr Infrared Portable Space Heater uses a high-efficiency blower to transfer heat.  This blower is twice as large and will move larger volumes of air than other competing space heaters.  In addition, this blower is virtually noiseless.  

Furthermore, the Dr Infrared Portable Space Heater uses a dual heating system.  This dual heating system combines both PTC and Quartz Infrared Heating.  PTC heating, or Positive Temperature Coefficient, helps to prevent overheating and reduce operating costs.  And, Quartz Infrared Heating heats up instantly and operates quietly.

This 1500 Watt, 12.5 Amp portable space heater features an electronic thermostat, which is also operational via remote, and has a heating range of 50 to 86 degrees.  In addition, this space heater offers a high and low feature to customize the amount of heat output.

And, for safety protection, the Dr Infrared Portable Space heater comes with a 12 hour automatic shutoff and tip-over protection.

Pros:

The consensus with this space heater is it heats up quickly and operates quietly.

Additionally, it is able to heat a large space and accommodate tall ceilings.

Cons:

The remote control only works if the heater is turned on.  And, some consumers have issues with the remote interfering with their other electronics.  And, perhaps, this may be a case where the remote uses the same frequency as other appliances.

 

Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect

Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Infrared Quartz Fireplace Stove with 3D Flame Effect

This next pick for best space heater for large room can heat up an area as large as 1,000 feet.  The Duraflame DFI-5010-01 Quartz Fireplace Stove uses Quartz infrared heating which will heat up instantly.  Furthermore, Quartz infrared heating will preserve the natural humidity in the air.

This 1500 Watt, 12.5 Amp space heater is constructed of metal and offers side windows and a beveled glass door.  And, there is access through the door for easy maintenance.

The Duraflame Quartz Fireplace Stove features an adjustable thermostat which can be turned up to a maximum of 82 degrees Fahrenheit.  Additionally, this thermostat is operable via remote control.

And, when you’re not using the heat, the flame effect can be turned on to set the mood.  Furthermore, this flame effect has 5 adjustable brightness and speed settings.

For safety purposes, the Duraflame Quartz Fireplace Stove is cool to the touch which is a necessity for households with children and pets.  

For overheat protection, this space heater features Safer Plug Fire Prevention Technology.  Safer Plug Fire Prevention Technology will automatically shutoff the stove if the temperature rises above the maximum safety level.

Finally, this space heater comes in your choice of 4 styles:  Black, Black Carleton, Bronze Steel or Pure Black.

Pros:

The Duraflame Quartz Fireplace Stove not only adds heat, but ambience as well.  And, the adjustable brightness and speed settings for the flame effects are a great addition.

Furthermore, because this unit uses Quartz heating, it will keep the air comfortably moist without drying it out.

Cons:

The remote control will only turn the heat on and off.  So, if you want to adjust the temperature, you’re going to have to do that in the unit.  And, when we mean in the unit, we mean in the unit.  You will have to open the door in order to set the temperature.

 

Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater

Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater

If you’re looking to heat up an even larger space, this pick for best space heater for large room will accommodate an area of 1500 square feet.

The Homegear Pro 1500w Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater uses Mica and Quartz Infrared Heating.  Like we stated earlier, Quartz heating will work instantaneously and keep the desired level of moisture in the air.  And, when it comes to Mica heating, or micathermic heating, this type of heating is good for transferring heat and will heat the air while radiating infrared heat waves.

This 1500 Watt space heater features a thermostat which can be set from 59 degrees to 86 degrees Fahrenheit.  In addition, the fan can be set to economy, low or high.

And, you can control all of this via the unit or the remote control.  Furthermore, this unit features an LED display to observe the current temperature.

The Homegear Pro Large Room Infrared Space Cabinet Heater comes with overheat protection.  If things get too hot, the unit will automatically turn off to avoid overheating.  In addition, this space heater will stay cool to the touch which is a necessity for households with kids and pets.

Lastly, this space heater comes in your choice of colors and color combinations:  Black, Brown and Black/White.

Pros:

If you’re looking to heat up a very large space, this is a great option for you to consider.  And, most consumers seem to agree, this space heater works extraordinarily well.

Furthermore, for peace of mind, this space heater operates quietly.

Cons:

Some consumers say it’s an exaggeration that this space heater can heat an area of 1500 square feet.  However, this is all determined by ceiling height, window draft and insulation.  So, if you have lower ceilings, tight-fitting windows and have good insulation, you shouldn’t have an issue.

 

Cadet RCP402S Space Heater "The Hot One"

Cadet RCP402S Space Heater “The Hot One”

If you’re looking for a garage heater or a super-strength indoor heater, this is a great option to check out.  The Cadet RCP402S Space Heater “The Hot One” will efficiently heat a space of 400 to 600 square feet at a range of 45 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit.

This 4000 Watt, 20 Amp space heater features a built-in double pole thermostat.  According to Cadet, a double pole thermostat contains a safety feature that single pole thermostats do not.  When a double pole thermostat is turned off, it will not turn back on once the temperature dips.

The Cadet “The Hot One” has low and high settings for heat output.  It also has the option of a fan without heat.  So, if you’re interested in a fan and a space heater, this is an excellent choice.

Furthermore, this space heater comes with a 6 foot cord and a bracket for standing or an optional wall or ceiling mount.

The Cadet “The Hot One” features a high-temperature safety shutoff.  Additionally, it is recommended that there is at least 3 feet of clearance from the front of the heater, a 6 inch clearance from the back and the top of the heater and a 12 inch clearance from both sides.

Finally, this space heater comes in your choice of Camo or Red.  And, it also comes in your choice of 4000 Watt or 5000 Watt.

Pros:

Consumers rave about how quickly and efficiently this space heater heats up.

Additionally, this is a high quality product with consumers stating that it has lasted them decades.

Cons:

This space heater can be a little loud.  However, most consumers agree that it is not an annoying loud.

 

Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater

Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater

Our final pick for best space heater for large room is efficient enough to heat an area of up to 1,000 square feet.

The Heat Storm Portable 1500 Watt Infrared Heater uses HMS Technology which combines with the humidity in the room to produce heat, while keeping the moisture in the air.  And, according to Heat Storm, HMS Technology will provide faster heating while running more efficiently, which will save on heating costs.

In addition, for more efficiency, this 1500 Watt space heater has an Energy Efficient Mode which will reduce the wattage from 1500 to 750 Watts.

The Heat Storm Portable Infrared Heater has an LED display which displays the ambient temperature.  And, an adjustable thermostat with a maximum temperature setting of 99 degrees Fahrenheit.  Furthermore, this can all be controlled with a remote control.

Lastly, for safety purposed, this space heater comes with an overheat sensor which will sense when things get too hot.  Once things get too hot, this space heater will automatically shut down.

Pros:

Consumers state that this space heater can heat up a space in no time.

Furthermore, it’s efficient, quiet and look great.

Cons:

While many consumers say the Heat Storm Portable Infrared Heater is quiet, others say the fan is a little noisy.  And, more specifically, that it sounds like white noise.

 

best leather recliner

Best Leather Recliner Chair Reviews

The first order of business when searching for the best leather recliner is comfort.  And, along with comfort comes support.  The best leather recliner should be comfortable, yet offer a soft, yet stabilized platform to promote good posture.  

The next thing to look for with the best leather recliner is durability.  Because these chairs have hinges, joints and handles, it is imperative to have these functioning.  And, not only functioning, but functioning for years.  So, durability equals longevity and both of these together equal extended comfort.

So, after we narrowed down the top leather recliners on the market based on these factors, we further filtered them by style.  And, because everyone has a different aesthetic, we have an array of leather recliners that will work for just about every space.  And, in the end, we chose classic leather and modern recliners.  However, the good news about both of these styles is they will work with just about any decor.  You can mix classic with modern and modern with classic.  So, whatever leather recliner you choose to go with, it’s pretty much a guarantee that it’s going to look like you’re lounging in a magazine.

Finally, our final 5 best leather recliners all have rave reviews from consumers.  And, this is important when purchasing a leather recliner because it also gages the longevity and the durability of the recliner.

 

Best Leather Recliner

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner
Barcalounger
Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner
Leather
Foam and Down Feather Fill
Mortise and Tenon Joints
Ottoman
Cup Holder
Table Receptacle
Ottoman Storage
35.5" x 35.5" x 43"
Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner
Lane
Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner
Leather
Vinyl
Steel Frame
40" x 44" x 48"
RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman
RECLINER GENIUS
100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman
Leather
Wood
Wood Veneer
Aluminum Base
Ottoman
Color Options
87" x 87" x 82"
Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman
Flash Furniture
Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman
LeatherSoft
Wood
Metal
Ottoman
360 Degree Swivel
Color Options
40" x 32.8" x 41"
Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman
Emorden Furniture
Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman
Leather
Aluminum Base
Laminated Veneer
Ottoman
360 Degree Swivel
Color Options
35.4" x 35" x 31.5"

 

Best Leather Recliner

 

Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner

Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner

Our first pick for best leather recliner is a traditional style recliner that has some aspects of mid century modern design.  And, since it contains the best of both worlds, this will look fabulous with any decor.

The Barcalounger Pedestal Cinna Ped Recliner is constructed with a hardwood and plywood frame and features mortise and tenon joints.  And, according to Popular Mechanics, mortise and tenon joints is considered one of the strongest woodworking joints.  These joints connect by attaching 2 pieces of wood at a 90 degree angle and glued to secure.

This leather recliner comes with 30 individual pocket coils in each seat cushion which is enclosed in high resilience foam.  And, perhaps the best part, this foam is topped with down feathers for the ultimate comfort.  In addition, this recliner features a sculpted foam back and a relaxing headrest.

The Barcalounger has additional features which makes this chair one of our favorite leather recliners on the market.  It has sliding arms which move backwards to reveal a cup holder and a receptacle for a table.  Furthermore, there is storage inside the ottoman which is perfect for books, magazines and remotes.

And, of course, let’s not forget about the leather.  The Barcalounger Cinna Ped Recliner comes with durable, yet soft, high-quality leather.  And, this particular recliner comes in a roasted chestnut color which can easily coordinated with just about any room in the house.

Lastly, this leather recliner comes from a company with quite a history and reputation.  Barcalounger has been around since the 1940’s and has consistently produced quality and luxury.

Pros:

For a high quality leather recliner, this price can’t be beat.  In addition, this recliner is extremely comfortable and the down feathers only add to the comfort.

And, because it is constructed with mortise and tenon joints, this recliner is extremely durable and will most likely last a lifetime.

Cons:

There isn’t many cons to this recliner.  It’s an amazing price for the amount of quality you get.  However, the one downfall is, it is so comfortable, you may never get anything done.

 

Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner

Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner

This next pick for best leather recliner has a traditional vintage design, so it can work with both classic and modern decor.  Furthermore, this is a leather recliner which is designed to support up to 500 pounds and it features a high seat back.  And, with both of these aspect combined, this recliner is a perfect fit for those who are big and tall.  Additionally, if you’re someone that likes to get lost while they’re lounging, this recliner will also be a good fit for you.

The Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner is constructed with a heavy-duty steel frame and filled with a polyurethane foam.  This foam has a density of 2.2 with 30 pounds of compression.  And, with these measurements, this will provide resilient support and pressure relief.

And, perhaps one of the best features of this leather recliner is it will extend to 79 inches when reclined, which is almost equivalent to a king-sized mattress.

Finally, the Lane Stallion Leather Comfort King Wallsaver Recliner features top grain leather with vinyl on the sides and on the back.  And, this vinyl will help prevent wear and tear and is easy to clean.

Pros:

If you’re really looking to sink into a recliner, this is probably your best option.  However, although sinking isn’t necessarily a term used for adequate back support, it is important to note that this recliner does offer a supportive base.  So, it’s the best of both worlds.

Furthermore, if you’re looking for a size solution, this leather recliner will hold a lot of weight and accommodate tall consumers.

Cons:

Some consumers state that the lumbar area could have more padding.

In addition, some consumers feel the chair is stiff which makes it difficult to recline.  And, the handle mechanism in relation to the chair is hard to reach, making it difficult to recline when in a seated position.

 

RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman

RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman

This leather recliner has a style reminiscent of the famous Herman Eames lounge chair at a fraction of the cost.  And, since this is a classic and iconic design, this recliner will work well with every type of decor.

The RECLINER GENIUS 100% Grain Italian Leather Recliner Lounge Chair with Ottoman is constructed with a wood veneer frame with a powder-coated, die-cast aluminum base.  And, it is covered with soft Italian leather upholstery.

This pick for best leather recliner offers ample back and neck support.  In addition, for extra comfort, it swivels and comes with an ottoman foot rest.

Lastly, this leather recliner comes in your choice of 3 colors.  Choose between Walnut Black, Brown or White.

Pros:

The RECLINER GENIUS Leather Recliner Lounge Chair is extremely comfortable and offers fabulous lumbar and neck support.

Furthermore, it is completely covered in Italian leather.  And, it doesn’t get much better than that.

Cons:

This leather chair reclines with body weight.  So, if you’re looking for a recliner that uses a lever, you may want to go with another option.

 

Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman

Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman

This pick for best leather recliner is a vintage-style recliner which will work well with both traditional and modern decor.

The Flash Furniture Contemporary Brown Vintage Leather Recliner and Ottoman is constructed with a wood and metal base and is covered in LeatherSoft upholstery.  LeatherSoft is a high-quality bonded type of leather made of leather and polyurethane.  And, it is softer and more comfortable than your typical bonded leather.  Furthermore, it keeps things cool and is resistant to fading and flaking.

This leather recliner features a mahogany wood base with 360 degree, ball-bearing swivel action.  In addition, for added comfort, this recliner comes with an integrated headrest and plush LeatherSoft upholstered arms.  To recline, simply adjust the side lever and use your weight to obtain your desired positioned.

Finally, this chair comes in your choice of Brown and Vintage Brown.

Pros:

The overall consensus of the Flash Furniture Contemporary Leather Recliner and Ottoman is it is a comfortable chair for the price.

Furthermore, it is easy to assemble and should take no more than 15 minutes to get setup and ready to lounge.

Cons:

There is no added lumbar support, however, most consumers feel there is enough support regardless.

And, the weight capacity of this chair is 250 pounds.  So, it may not work for everyone.

 

Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman

Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman

This last pick for best leather recliner is another replica of the famous Herman Eames chair.  However, although this is a replica, it is a high quality and well constructed chair.  And, since this is an iconic and classic style of chair, it will go with any decor.

The Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman is constructed with 100% vintage leather which includes all the piping and all the buttons.  It is filled with high-elastic soft foam which offers the ultimate in comfort and in resilience.  Furthermore, it features a 7-ply laminated veneer which lines the bottom and the back of the chair, as well as the ottoman.  This laminated veneer will help to prevent warping and cracking.

This leather recliner has an aluminum base with a 360 degree swivel, while the manual tilt offers a 15 degree recline.  And, the head and back rest features rubber shock mounts for increased flexibility.

The Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman is easy to clean.  It is recommended to use a soft-bristled vacuum and clean with leather-approved oil.  In addition, direct sunlight should be avoided.

Finally, this leather recliner comes in your choice of 4 leather and veneer colors.  Choose between Light Brown Aniline and Palisander Veneer, Red Aniline Leather and Palisander Laminated Veneer, Red Italian Leather and Natural Oak Laminated Veneer or Vintage Leather and Palisander Veneer.

Pros:

The Emorden Furniture Leather Lounge Chair & Ottoman is pretty much an exact replica of the famous Herman Eames chair.  And, if you have ever had the privilege of sitting in one of the chairs, it is one of the most comfortable chairs you will ever witness.

Furthermore, this leather recliner is made with high quality materials so longevity and durability are in your future.

Cons:

For some, a 15 degree angle is just not going to do it.  So, if you are looking to recline in a sleeping type of position, it’s best to go with a different chair.  And, quite possibly, a different design.

 

best kitchen faucets

Best Kitchen Faucets Reviews 2018

If you’re looking for the best kitchen faucets, we have chosen 5 of the top kitchen faucets on the market.  Each one of these faucets are made with high-quality materials, durable construction and are highly regarded amongst consumers.

So, what you need to do is figure out which of these best kitchen faucets is going to accommodate your sink.  And, here are a few things to consider:

  • How much headroom do you need?  Some sinks are deeper than others.  Therefore, the deeper the sink, the shorter the arc the faucet should have.  On the reverse side, the more shallow the sink, the taller the arc should be.  However, we do have a pick that has a rather tall arc, but because the spout hangs down lower, it can accommodate a deeper sink.  So, use your best judgement when eyeing the height of the arc in regards to the spout, and take that into consideration with the depth of your sink.
  • How many mounting holes does your sink accommodate?  If it accommodates 1 hole, you should look for an all-inclusive faucet.  If it has 3 holes, you should look for a faucet with separate levers or a faucet with a base which will cover the holes.  With our picks for best kitchen faucets, these all come with an optional 3-hole deck plate.  So, if you choose one of the faucets below, you won’t have to worry about the amount of mounting holes you have.  Just as long as you have one.
  • What is the finish of your doorknobs, handles and other accessories?  For design and aesthetic purposes, the faucet should match these accessories.  And, most of our picks have options that will accommodate your desired finish.  Some of these finishes include bronze, stainless steel, chrome and black.

So, by now you should have an idea of what you need to outfit your kitchen sink.  Like we mentioned previously, we have chosen some of the highest quality kitchen faucets on the market.  And, these faucets have a huge fan following of a lot of happy consumers.

 

Best Kitchen Faucets

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Delta Faucet 9113-AR-DST Essa Single Handle Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet
Delta Faucet
9113-AR-DST Essa Single Handle Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet
Metal
High Arc
Spray and Stream
20 Inch Hose Reach
Optional 3-Hole Deck Plate
Finish Options
9.38" x 10.25" x 15.75"
Kraus KPF-2620SS Modern Oletto Single Lever Pull Down Kitchen Faucet
Kraus
KPF-2620SS Modern Oletto Single Lever Pull Down Kitchen Faucet
Metal
High Arc
Spray and Stream
Optional 3-Hole Deck Plate
Finish Options
8.61" x 2" x 15.75"
Kraus KPF-1650SS Modern Nola Single Lever Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet
Kraus
KPF-1650SS Modern Nola Single Lever Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet
Metal
High Arc
Spring-Style Hose
Spray and Stream
Optional 3-Hole Deck Plate
Finish Options
8.84" x 1.8" 26.19"
KOHLER K-596-CP Simplice Single-Hole Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet
KOHLER
K-596-CP Simplice Single-Hole Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet
Metal
High Arc
Spray, Stream and Pause
Optional 3-Hole Deck Plate
Finish Options
9" x 2" x 10.5"
Moen Arbor One-Handle High Arc Pulldown Kitchen Faucet
Moen
Arbor One-Handle High Arc Pulldown Kitchen Faucet
Metal
High Arc
Spray, Stream and Pause
Optional 3-Hole Deck Plate
Finish Options
7.87" x 3.5" x 15.5"

 

Best Kitchen Faucets

 

Delta Faucet 9113-AR-DST Essa Single Handle Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet

Delta Faucet 9113-AR-DST Essa Single Handle Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet

Our first pick for best kitchen faucets comes in 4 different finishes:  Arctic Stainless, Chrome, Matte Black and Venetian Bronze.  And, this faucet is a modern Euro-design which will work well with both classic and modern decor.

The Delta Faucet 9113-AR-DST Essa Single Handle Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet accommodates a 1 or 3-hole installation.  Furthermore, it has a 3/8 inch water supply connection and will need a 1.5 inch clearance from the backsplash.

For the full measurements of this faucet, the height is 15.75 inches, the spout reach is 9.38 inches and the width of the base is 10.25 inches with 8 inches between the mounting holes.  However, if you only have 1 installation hole, you will only need a 1.25″ hole clearance to accommodate the faucet without the base plate.

This kitchen faucet features a high-arc spout which works best with a shallow sink.  And, this spout swivels 360 degrees and offers a 62 inch hose with a 20 inch reach.  Once you’re finished with the hose, it locks into the MagnaTite Docking.  This docking uses a magnet to keep the sprayer stable and in place.

This Delta Essa Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet will last for up to 5 million uses and comes with DIAMOND Seal Technology.  DIAMOND Seal Technology is a patented design which helps further prevent leaks and extends the life of the faucet.

Another notable aspect of this kitchen faucet is it has touch-clean spray holes which allow for the mineral buildup to be removed swiftly and easily.  It’s so easy, all you have to do is wipe it away with a finger.

Pros:

Because this kitchen faucet only needs a 1.5 inch clearance from the backsplash, this is a great option for those who need a tight fit.

Furthermore, this faucet has a strong sprayer.  And, this could be a plus for some people or a negative for others.  Whatever the case may be, it will efficiently clean the dishes.

Lastly, this kitchen faucet is very easy to install.

Cons:

Like we mentioned above, the Delta Essa Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet has a strong sprayer.  And, this could be seen as a negative as strong sprayers tend to get a bit messy.

 

Kraus KPF-2620SS Modern Oletto Single Lever Pull Down Kitchen Faucet

Kraus KPF-2620SS Modern Oletto Single Lever Pull Down Kitchen Faucet

This pick for best kitchen faucets comes in your choice of Chrome or Stainless Steel.  And, it features a modern design that will work well with classic or contemporary decor.

The Kraus KPF-2620SS Modern Oletto Single Lever Pull Down Kitchen Faucet accommodates a hole size of 1-3/8 inches to 1-1/2 inches for installation.  In addition, this kitchen faucet will need a backsplash clearance of 2-1/2 inches.

Furthermore, this kitchen faucet has a height of 15-3/4 inches, a spout reach of 8-11/16 inches and a base width of 2 inches.  So, because it doesn’t have too high of an arc, this kitchen faucet will work well for both deep and shallow sinks.

The Kraus Oletto Pull Down Kitchen Faucet is extremely durable with a 100% metal body.  In addition, it comes with a corrosion and rust-resistant finish.

This kitchen faucet comes with a 360 degree swivel, pull-down sprayer.  And, the Kraus Oletto Kitchen Faucet has a single-lever control which allows you to set the flow and the temperature.  In addition, it also comes with a button on the spout which allows you to easily switch from stream to spray.

Finally, this kitchen faucet features extra protection from drips for the lifetime of the faucet.  And, it comes with an easy-to-clean rubber nozzle to keep the passageways free from buildup.

Pros:

This kitchen faucet provides a strong water stream, so you may not really need to use the sprayer as often.

In addition, this kitchen faucet is extremely well-built and it is constructed of solid metal.

Also, this is one of the easiest faucets to install, with some consumers saying it took them no more than an hour.  So, you may be able to forgo the plumber with this one.

Cons:

This could be a positive or a negative, but the sprayer is only functional when the button is pressed consistently.  Some consumers like this feature and some consumers do not.

 

Kraus KPF-1650SS Modern Nola Single Lever Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet

Kraus KPF-1650SS Modern Nola Single Lever Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet

The Kraus KPF-1560SS Modern Nola Single Lever Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet comes in your choice of Chrome or Stainless Steel finish.  And, because it is designed as a commercial-style faucet, it will work with every style and every decor.

This pick for best kitchen faucets accommodates a hole size of 1-3/8 inches.  And, it will need a backsplash clearance of approximately 2-1/2 inches.

Furthermore, this kitchen faucet has a height of 26-3/16 inches, a spout reach of 8-27/32 inches and a base width of 1-1/8 inches.  And, once you have all your measurements, you can determine if this kitchen faucet will work with what you’ve got.

This kitchen faucet is tall with a high arc which is usually best paired with a shallow sink.  However, because the spout sits down lower, this will work just as well with a deeper sink.

The Kraus Nola Commercial Style Kitchen Faucet is made of lead-free 100% metal.  In addition, it features a corrosion and rust-resistant finish.

The Kraus Nola Kitchen Faucet comes equipped with a 360 degree swivel spout.  This spout comes attached to a spring-style hose which conveniently pulls down and rests in a magnetic dock.

In order to operate this sink, the stream function on this kitchen faucet works via lever.  And, you can switch to the spray and back to the stream via button on the spout.

Finally, the Kraus Nola Kitchen Faucet features a Kerox ceramic cartridge which will help prevent dripping for the lifetime of the faucet.  In addition, the spout has a rubber nozzle which prevents mineral buildup.

Pros:

We love the industrial design of this kitchen faucet and it will look amazing with every type of decor.

Furthermore, the spring-style hose makes for easy access and easy reach for all the nooks and crannies in the sink.

And, this kitchen faucet is extremely easy to install.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained about low water pressure.  However, the majority of consumers state they have great water pressure.  Sometimes there’s just some bad apples in the bunch.

 

KOHLER K-596-CP Simplice Single-Hole Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet

KOHLER K-596-CP Simplice Single-Hole Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet

This pick for best kitchen faucets comes in your choice of finishes:  Matte Black, Polished Chrome or Vibrant Stainless.  And, since this kitchen faucet is a sleek, elegant and simple design, it will go well with either classic or contemporary surroundings.

The Kohler K-596-CP Simplice Single-Hole Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet accommodates a mounting hole size of 2 inches and will need a backsplash clearance of 2-1/2 inches.

In addition, this kitchen faucet has a height of 10-1/2 inches, a spout reach of 9 inches and a base width of 2 inches.  And, this is a high arc kitchen faucet.  However, because the arc is only 10-1/2 inches tall, this can accommodate both deep and shallow sinks.

The Kohler Simplice Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet is made of premium metal construction.  In addition, it comes with a corrosion and tarnish-resistant finish.

This kitchen faucet comes equipped with a 3-in-1 pull-down spout.  This 360 degree spout allows for touch control to navigate from stream to sweep and to pause.  Furthermore, you can also control the stream and the temperature via the single-handle lever.

The Kohler Simplice Pull-Down Kitchen Faucet features an angled nozzle which allows you to sweep spray.  The sweep spray function will make it easy to reach all corners of the sink and all angles of the dishes.  In addition, this kitchen faucet comes with a magnetic docking which will allow for secure storage for the spout after use.  And, after use, the faucet will remember the temperature used prior.  So, the next time you start up the faucet, you’re all set for your desired temperature.

Pros:

Kohler has been around since 1873 and produces some of the highest quality plumbing products on the market.  So, when you’re purchasing a Kohler product, you can ensure it’s going to be durable and will last you for years to come.

Furthermore, one of the features we love about this kitchen faucet is the sweep spray.  Sometimes with a pull down faucet, it can be tough to hit all the corners of the sink without doing some finagling.  This feature makes it extremely easy.

And, this kitchen faucet is a piece of cake to install, with some consumers stating it took no more than 15 minutes.

Cons:

Although the pause function is a nice touch, it can get a little confusing when you’re dealing with the stream and the spray as well.  However, once you get the hang of it, you’ll be navigating these controls like a pro in no time.

 

Moen Arbor One-Handle High Arc Pulldown Kitchen Faucet

Moen Arbor One-Handle High Arc Pulldown Kitchen Faucet

Our final pick for best kitchen faucets is available in 4 different finishes:  Matte Black, Chrome, Oil-Rubbed Bronze and Spot Resist Stainless.  And, this is a simply designed faucet which will work with every decor, from traditional to modern and everything in between.

The Moen Arbor One-Handle High Arc Pulldown Kitchen Faucet accommodates a mounting hole size of 2-1/2 inches.  Furthermore, this kitchen faucet will need a backsplash clearance of at least 1-1/2 inches.  However, some consumers say they don’t even need that much room.

This kitchen faucet has a height of 15-1/2 inches, a spout reach of 7-7/8 inches and a base width of 3-1/2 inches.  In addition, this is a high arc sink but the spout sits somewhere in-between.  So, it should work just fine with a deep or shallow sink.

The Moen Arbor Pulldown Kitchen Faucet is made with metal construction and features a 68 inch braided hose.  This braided hose has a reflex system for easy and smooth operation.  And, it comes with secure docking system to keep the hose in place when not in use.

This kitchen faucet offers three functions:  stream, spray and pause.  To operate the stream function, simply use the one-handle lever.  And, to operate the spray and pause function, you will find a button on the spout that you can conveniently operate while using the hose.

Furthermore, this kitchen faucet offers Power Boost™ Technology which allows you to boost the water performance and allow for more water to flow through in a record amount of time.

Pros:

Moen has been around since the 1940’s and they have consistently put out quality plumbing-ware.  So, this is a highly trusted company.

In addition, with this pick for best kitchen faucets, it is quality constructed and easy to use.  And, the other easy thing about this kitchen faucet is it’s easy to install.  However, some consumers say it is easier with 2 people.

Cons:

After a few years, some consumers have complained about leaks.  But, it’s important to note that these consumers are in the minority.  These types of leaks can happen with any product, and a lot of times it’s just an easy fix.

 

best latte machine

Best Latte Machine for Every Connoisseur

The first step into purchasing the best latte machine is knowing exactly what you’re looking for.  Latte machines can be rather simple or complex.  And, usually you can determine what you need depending on what type of connoisseur you are.  There are coffee snobs and then there are people who consider coffee to be just coffee.  And, in this case, a latte to be just a latte.

So, if you’re always in search for the best latte, we suggest going with a more complex, and consequently, more expensive machine.  If you’re one of those who really can’t tell the difference from one latte to another, we suggest going with a more simplistic latte machine.

On our list for best latte machine, we chose 5 of the top machines on the market.  These latte machines are highly-regarded by connoisseurs and non-connoisseurs alike.  And, when we say highly-regarded, this means they pass with flying colors for their quality and the frothy lattes they deliver.

 

Best Latte Machine

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Breville BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus
Breville
BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus
7 Coffee Variaties
11 Temperature Levels
8 Froth Texture Levels
19 Pressure Levels
12.5" x 7" x 12"
Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker
Mr. Coffee
Cafe Latte Maker
24 oz Capacity
Automatic Shutoff
Milk Frother
11.9" x 6.9" x 13.8"
Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine
Breville
Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine
15 Bar Pump
Steam Wand
Automatic Frother
Milk Container
15.5" x 13.3" x 17.6"
Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista Premium Espresso & Cappuccino System
Mr. Coffee
Cafe Barista Premium Espresso & Cappuccino System
15 Bar Pump
Automatic Frother
Color Options
11.2" x 8.9" x 12.6"
Saeco HD8924/47 PicoBaristo Automatic Milk Frother Espresso Machine
Saeco
HD8924/47 PicoBaristo Automatic Milk Frother Espresso Machine
8 Coffee Variaties
5 Strength Settings
10 Grinder Settings
Automatic Milk Frother
19.5" x 11" x 18

 

Best Latte Machine

 

Breville BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus

Breville BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus

Our first pick for best latte machine is a fantastic choice for those who are particular about their latte.  And, not only a latte, but a ristretto, espresso, cappuccino, macchiato, lungo and more.

The Breville BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus offers an automatic beverage selection with adjustable settings.  These adjustasble settings include coffee measurement, milk temperature and milk texture.

The coffee measurment setting allows you to adjust the amount of espresso volume.  While, the milk temperature setting offers 11 settings between 133 degrees and 169 degrees Fahrenheit, with a 3 second heat-up time.  And, the milk texture setting offers 8 textures of froth.

All of these settings are displayed on an LCD display which will guide and assist you throughout the process.  In addition, this LCD display will guide you through maintenance such as cleaning and descaling.

The Breville BNE800BSS Nespresso Creatista Plus features 19 bars of pressure.  And, for those who are new to the game, the more bars of pressure you have, the faster the coffee will extract.  However, according to our friends at the Perfect Daily Grind, 9 bars is the ideal pressure for the perfect cup of espresso.

Lastly, this latte machine comes with a a stainless steel milk jug.  And, it features a 1.5 Liter tank which will yield about a week’s worth of lattes.

Pros:

The Breville Nespresso Creatista Plus makes some fabulous froth.  And, because it offers 8 textures of froth, you’re able to froth to your exact specifications.

Furthermore, this latte machine features a large water tank, which will most likely last you a week, or even longer.

Cons:

This latte machine only allows for espresso pods and requires Nespresso espresso capsules.  For some people, this is a positive feature; less mess and a perfect grind.

However, not everyone is a fan of the pods and this can be a huge negative.

 

Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker

Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker

This pick for best latte maker is as simple as it gets.  So, this one is for those who love lattes, but yet, a latte is just a latte is just a latte.

The Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker is a one-touch automatic latte maker which not only brews lattes, but hot chocolate as well.

This 24 ounce latte maker simotaneously brews coffee or espresso and froths milk.  Once finished with the brew process, the Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker automatically shuts off.

To clean this latte maker, simply run the brew basket through the dishwasher and wipe the carafe with a damp cloth as this carafe is not dishwasher safe.  

Finally, included is a 20 recipe book for how to create everthing from a classic latte to a gingerbread latte.  And, of course, hot chocolate.

Pros:

This latte machine is about as hassle-free as you’re going to get.  And, for being so simple, it makes a surprisingly fantastic latte.

Furthermore, it’s a perfect solution for a large household.

Cons:

The Mr. Coffee Cafe Latte Maker does not brew regular coffee.  However, a consumer seemed to figure out the trick.  Instead of filling the frother with milk, fill it with water.  And, this seems to do the trick.

In addition, the carafe is not dishwasher safe.  Although, it doesn’t take very long to just rinse it out or wipe it down.

 

Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine

Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine

This latte machine is a great choice for a household of 2 or more coffee snobs.  The Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine offers all the features of a professional latte machine.  And, it’s fitting for 2 as it offers the ability to make 1 or 2 espresso shots at once.

This latte machine has a 15 bar Italian-style pump which automatically begins with a low pressure and slowly graduates to an intense pressure.  And, this particular method of espresso extraction is used by professional baristas.

The Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine has a 1 or 2-cup single or dual wall filter basket which will manually control the volume of espresso. Once the espresso is extracted, simply steam the milk with the traditional-style frother.  This frother is made of heavy-duty stainless steel, has a 360 degree swivel and offers a safety handle for helping to prevent burns while handling the wand.

This pick for best latte machine features quite the tank.  It features a 61 ounce water tank which should last a week or more.  Of course, this all depends on your latte intake.  Furthermore, the Breville Duo Temp Pro Espresso Machine has a built in water filter which will help reduce contaminents.

Pros:

This latte machine is extremely easy and great machine to learn on.  In addition, the water heats up fast, so there’s little downtime from having no latte to having a latte.

Furthermore, many consumers rave this latte machine is consistant and reliable.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained this latte machine contains plastic parts.  Unfortunately, though, at this price point, you will be seeing plastic parts with the majority of the machines out there.

And, a couple of consumers have complained this latte machine is rather loud.  Perhaps, it’s a sign that it’s working well.  Although, we must say, most latte machines are rather noisy and we don’t find this one to be anything out of the extroidanary.

 

Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista Premium Espresso & Cappuccino System

Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista Premium Espresso & Cappuccino System

This pick for best latte machine is another great one for those who would rather not deal with the complexities of a more expensive machine.  The Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista Premium Espresso & Cappuccino System is a semi-automatic machine which brews espresso, cuppauccino and lattes.

This latte machine features a one-touch control panel which will allow you to select the drink of your choice.  And, it has a 15 bar pump, which will extract commercial-quality espresso.  Furthermore, this latte machine has an automatic milk frother to froth the perfect latte everytime.

And, with the Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista, you will be able to select a single or a double shot.  Which, makes this a great option for 2 or more latte lovers.

Finally, this latte machine comes in your choice of 3 colors:  White, Red or Stainless Steel.

Pros:

The Mr. Coffee Cafe Barista is extremely easy to use and a great choice for those who just don’t want to deal.  And, it brews a latte, cappuccino or espresso quickly and easily.

Furthermore, this latte machine has a cleaning system which is simple to operate.  Just press a button to run hot water through the extraction tube or the milk frother.

Cons:

A minority of consumers complained the water tank leaked within months of use.  And, another minority of consumers said this latte machine broke down within months.

Furthermore, there were other consumers who complained the milk wasn’t frothing hot enough.

Saeco HD8924/47 PicoBaristo Automatic Milk Frother Espresso Machine

Saeco HD8924/47 PicoBaristo Automatic Milk Frother Espresso Machine

Our final pick for best latte machine is a high-end machine for those who are serious about their lattes.  And, the Saeco HD8924/47 PicoBaristo Automatic Milk Frother Espresso Machine offers 8 coffee varieties.  Some of these varities include espresso, espresso lungo, ristretto, cafe crema, cappicino, espresso double and cafe latte.

In addition, not only does this latte machine offer 8 coffee varities, it also offers 10 grinder settings for a more intense latte experience or for those days where you just need a small pick me up.

This latte machine operates by a one-touch automatic system.  Simply choose a coffee variety, push a button and the espresso will extract.  And, the same works with the froth.  Just push a button and the automatic milk frother will do all the work for you.

The Saeco HD8924/47 PicoBaristo also features a strength selection which will remember how strong you like your espresso.

Finally, this latte machine has an AquaClean filter which can deliver up to 5,000 lattes without descaling.

Pros:

This latte machine is extremely customizable – from the strength of the espresso, to the grinder settings, to the coffee temperature.  And, it really does just about everything for you with a professional outcome.

Furthermore, this latte machine allows for ground coffee beans or whole beans. 

And, The Saeco PicoBaristo is fairly easy to learn and simple to operate.  Just be sure to read the instructions thoroughly before use and you shouldn’t have any issues.

Cons:

Depending on your space, this can be a good thing or a bad thing.  But, make sure you have the adequate space for this machine.  The Saeco PicoBaristo is narrow but long.  And, you will need space to flip the top cover open for beans and water.

Lastly, this latte machine is on the expensive side.  But, it is a high-end and high-quality machine.  And, without ordering a latte out everyday, will pay for itself over time.  Probably sooner than you can imagine.

best hammock with stand

Best Hammock with Stand – Wood or Steel

In order to find the best hammock with stand, we relied heavily on consumer reviews.  The reason for this is, the best hammock with stand needs to be durable.  And, if it’s going to hold our weight, we want to make sure we can trust it.  So, the most important aspect of a hammock is it’s going to be our friend, not our enemy.

The next aspect we looked for in the best hammock with stand is it has to look good.  When a hammock looks good, it looks more inviting.  And, when it looks more inviting, you will get more lounging out of it.  But, we are suckers for great aesthetics and design anyway, so this aspect is always on the forefront for us.

best hammock with stand

Finally, we looked for quality materials and quality construction.  Of course, with quality materials and construction, the hammock is going to be durable.  But, it’s also going to feel great – especially with quality material for the part you lounge on.

After all was said and done, our final 6 best hammocks exceeded our expectations.  And, these are some of the most highly regarded and trustworthy hammocks on the market.

So, which one is the right hammock for you?  Well, we have chosen an array of 1 and 2 person hammocks, each containing a weight restriction.  And, as long as you pay close attention to the restrictions, you will be on your way to owning the best hammock just for you, and perhaps some lucky partner.

 

Best Hammock with Stand

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Giantex Wooden Curved Arc Wide Hammock Swing Stand Set
Giantex
Wooden Curved Arc Wide Hammock Swing Stand Set
Russia Larch Wood Stand
Polyester Cotton Hammock
1 Person/264 Lbs Max
Sizes Options
123" x 46" x 48"
142" x 50" x 51"
161.4" x 47.2" x 48"
Vivere Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand
Vivere
Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand
Heavy Gauge Steel Stand
100% Cotton Hammock
2 Person/450 Lbs Max
Color Options
130" x 94" x 63"
Sunnydaze Decor Large 2 Person Spreader Bar Hammock with Stand
Sunnydaze Decor
Large 2 Person Spreader Bar Hammock with Stand
Steel Stand
Polyester Hammock
Wood Spreader Bars
2 Person/350 Lbs Max
Color Options

157" x 55" x 48"
Sorbus Hammock with Spreader Bars
Sorbus
Hammock with Spreader Bars
Powder-Coated Steel Stand
Cotton Hammock
Wood Spreader Bars
2 Person/450 Lbs Max
Color Options
147" x 47" x 47"
Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo
Caribbean Hammocks
Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo
20 Gauge Steel Stand
Polyester Hammock
Wood Spreader Bars
2 Person/600 Lbs Max
Color Options
156" x 55"
Lazy Daze Hammocks Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand
Lazy Daze Hammocks
Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand
Powder-Coated Steel Stand
Canvas Hammock
2 Person/450 Lbs Max
Color Options
115" x 48" x 30"

 

Best Hammock with Stand

Giantex Wooden Curved Arc Wide Hammock Swing Stand Set

Giantex Wooden Curved Arc Wide Hammock Swing Stand Set

Our first pick for best hammock with stand is a one person hammock with a maximum weight limit of 264 pounds.  And, it measures 142 inches long, 50 inches wide, 51 inches tall and weighs 61 pounds.  However, there are size options.  This particular one is the mid-range option, so you can go smaller or larger.

The Giantex Wooden Curved Arc Wide Hammock Swing Stand Set is made of Russia Larch Wood.  According to Russian Lumber, the Russian Larch is a softwood tree with properties of real hardwood.  Furthermore, the annual rings are very wide, which make this wood particularly strong.

The hammock is made of 260 gram polyester cotton with a woven texture and comes in a soft cream color.  And, this color will go with every environment and every decor.

The Giantex Wooden Curved Arc Hammock Stand Set features wooden stretcher bars and durable hanging loops.  And, like the name of this product suggests, you have a swinging option with this hammock.  So, with the durability of the construction, feel free to lounge during the day and swing away at night.

Pros:

This pick for best hammock with stand is extremely sturdy and solid.

Furthermore, it is ergonomically designed for a modern take on the classic hammock.  So, it’s going to look sleek and worth every penny.

And, if you wish to make this a double hammock, this stand is durable enough to fit a double or extra wide hammock.

Cons:

Some consumers say this was fairly easy to assemble while others had a more difficult time.  

Vivere Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand

Vivere Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand

This pick can be used for 1 or 2 people and has a weight limit of 450 pounds.  The Vivere Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand measures 130 inches  long, 94 inches wide, 63 inches tall and weighs 34 pounds.

And, this hammock features a space-saving stand made out of heavy gauge steel.  So, not only is it space-saving, it is ultra durable.

The Vivere Double Hammock is made of 100% cotton and comes in your choice of striped color combinations:  Denim, Desert Moon, Oasis, Rio Night, Salsa and Tropical.

Finally, this hammock comes with a carrying case and is ultra lightweight.  So, you can take it to the park with you.

Pros:

Because it’s well-constructed and made with heavy gauge steel, this hammock is super durable.  And, some consumers went over the weight capacity and are pleasantly unscathed.  But, of course, we don’t recommend this.

In addition, the Vivere Double Hammock is very easy to assemble.  And, it is rather lightweight so you can pretty much take it anywhere.

Cons:

Because this hammock is made of 100% cotton, for your safety, you’re going to need to take extra care of it.  When cotton is exposed to certain types of weather, such as rain, it can deteriorate over time.  And, once it deteriorates, it’s an accident waiting to happen.

Sunnydaze Decor Large 2 Person Spreader Bar Hammock with Stand

Sunnydaze Decor Large 2 Person Spreader Bar Hammock with Stand

This pick for best hammock with stand is built for 1 or 2 people and measures 157 inches long, 55 inches wide and 48 inches tall.  And, overall, this hammock and stand weighs 44 pounds and has a 350 pound weight capacity.

The Sunnydaze Decor Large 2 Person Spreader Bar Hammock features as steel stand with a hand-woven soft-spun polyester.  Furthermore, this polyester hammock has wooden spreader bars which are weather-resistant.

And, this hammock comes in your choice of colors:  Blue, Cream, Green, Mocha, Multi-Color, Red, Sky Blue, Tan and Yellow.

The Sunnydaze Decor 2 Person Hammock is attached by zinc-coated, 9-inch chains and 2 3-inch s-hooks.  This will ensure the hammock is secure for your safety.

Pros:

The rope construction of the hammock is soft and comfortable.  Furthermore, the wooden stretcher bars give this hammock extra style.

In addition, this hammock is extremely table and sturdy.  And, it’s also easy to assemble.

Cons:

Because the Sunnydaze Decor 2 Person Hammock Stand has a 350 pound weight capacity, it may only work for 1 person in your household.

Also, some consumers state the material is a bit saggy and it stretches over time.

Sorbus Hammock with Spreader Bars

Sorbus Hammock with Spreader Bars

This hammock with stand accommodates 2 people at a maximum weight of 450 pounds.  The Sorbus Hammock with Spreader Bars measures 147 inches long, 47 inches wide, 47 inches tall and it weighs roughly 45 pounds.

This hammock stand is constructed with powder-coated steel and a durable cotton hammock which is weather and UV resistant.  And, this hammock comes in your choice of color combinations:  Green/Blue, Blue/Red, Mocha and Blue/Aqua.  Furthermore, the hammock is washable.  

The Sorbus Hammock comes with solid wood spreader bars attached to heavy-duty rope.  And, with these durable materials, your safety will be ensured.

Finally, this 2-person hammock comes with a detachable pillow which will accommodate 2 people.

Pros:

The Sorbus Hammock with Spreader Bars is extremely simply to assemble.

Furthermore, consumers rave about how sturdy and durable this hammock is.  And, they also rave about how comfortable it is.

Cons:

This hammock may be a little tricky to get in and out of.  You may need to steady yourself in the middle and carefully position your feet so as to not end up with a faceplant.

Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo

Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo

This next pick can accommodate 1 or 2 people at a maximum weight capacity of 600 pounds.  The Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo measures 156 inches long and 55 inches wide.

This hammock stand is made with 20-gauge, cold-rolled, powder-coated steel.  And, with cold-rolled steel, this stand is going to offer uniformity and will have an extremely smooth surface.  Furthermore, with the powder coating, this will help protect the stand from rust and corrosion.

The hammock is made out of soft-spun polyester with a micro-weave and comes in your choice of colors:  Cream, Dark Blue, Green, Light Blue, Mocha, Olive, Orange, Purple, Rainbow, Red, Tan, Yellow, Crimson, Multi Color Dark Blue, Multi Color Light Blue, Multi Color Orange, Multi Color Purple and Multi Color Yellow.

The Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo is easy to assemble and features easy-snap assembly.  And, this stand can be assembled in under 5 minutes.  So, if you’re preconceiving moving this hammock from one location to the next, breaking this hammock down and setting it up will be a cinch.

Pros:

We love that this hammock comes in so many different colors.  And, these color options offer a vibrancy usually only found in the Caribbean.

Furthermore, the stand is ultra sturdy and the hammock is soft and comfortable.  It is also a cinch to put together, especially for those of us who would rather be lounging.

Cons:

The Caribbean Hammocks Jumbo Caribbean Hammock Stand Combo may be difficult to get in and out of.

In addition, some may find this hammock to sag too much for their liking.  However, you can tighten it if need be.

Lazy Daze Hammocks Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand

Lazy Daze Hammocks Double Hammock with Space Saving Stand

Our final pick for best hammock with stand accommodates a maximum of 2 people and a maximum weight capacity of 450 pounds.  And, this hammock measures 115 inches long, 48 inches wide and 30 inches tall.

The Lazy Daze Hammocks Double Hammock Stand is built with heavy-duty steel with a powder coating.  And, this powder coating is resistant to weather and it will protect it from rust.  Furthermore, the ends of the stand are capped in plastic for a finished look.

This hammock is made with canvas and is machine washable.  And, with this pick, you get your choice of color combinations:  Lime & Orange Stripe, Oasis Stripe and Techno.

Finally, the Lazy Daze Hammocks Double Hammock is a space-saving option and a portable option.  It assembles and disassembles in a matter of minutes and can be folded down to fit inside the included carrying bag.

Pros:

For the price, you get a whole lot of bang for your buck.

Furthermore, it’s extremely sturdy and well constructed.  And, it’s portable.  So, take it camping or to the lake with you.

Cons:

Some consumers had missing parts when the hammock arrived.

In addition, some consumers found it difficult to fit all the parts in the carrying bag.  So, if you like puzzles, this may be the hammock for you.

best reclining sofa

Best Reclining Sofa – Top 6 Comfortable Picks

If you’re looking for the best reclining sofa for the ultimate lounge session, we have the top 5 comfortable and movie-night worthy picks on the market.  And, these picks are not only comfortable, they look great as well.

So, how did we manage to find the best reclining sofas?  Well, we are professional shoppers with a whole lot of experience, so that does help.  And, we started out with a list of all the qualities we want in the best reclining sofa and then we checked it twice.

First up on our list in search of the best reclining sofa is it has to look great.  And, if a sofa looks great, it’s going to be all that more inviting to sit in.

Next, we insist on nothing but quality.  That means, quality materials and quality construction.  Furthermore, the company has to have a quality reputation and they have to stand behind their product.

And, if the sofa is made out of quality materials with quality construction, that means it is going to be durable and is going to take years and years of being sat on, slept on and in some cases, jumped on.

Our final step on our list to picking out the best reclining sofa is to keep tabs on consumer reviews, and ultimately, consumer satisfaction.  There really is no better way to gage a product than to take it from first hand accounts.  And, with our final 5 picks for best reclining sofa, these are some of the most highly regarded sofas currently available.

So, if you’ve got your movie picked out, but all you need is a sofa, check out our final picks below.

 

Best Reclining Sofa

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional
Serta
Palisades Reclining Sectional
Upholstery
Hidden Storage
Right/Left Chaise Option
Color Options
89" x 32" x 36"
VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa
VIVA HOME
Reclining Sofa
Leather
PU
36" x 37" x 40"
57" x 37" x 40"
78" x 37" x 40"
Homelegance Nicasio Contemporary All Genuine Power Reclining Sofa
Homelegance
Nicasio Contemporary All Genuine Power Reclining Sofa
Leather
Color Options
66" x 37" x 39.25"
87" x 37" x 39.25"
Ashley Krismen Collection 7810215 Power Reclining Sofa
Ashley
Krismen Collection 7810215 Power Reclining Sofa
USB Port85" x 45" x 45"
Homelegance 9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa
Homelegance
9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa
Leather
Vinyl
Color Options
83" x 38.5" x 40"
90" x 38.5" x 40"

 

Best Reclining Sofa

 

Ashley Krismen Collection 7810215 Power Reclining Sofa

Ashley Krismen Collection 7810215 Power Reclining Sofa

Our first pick for best reclining sofa is one that will keep you in your seat.  And, that’s because this power reclining sofa has a USB port to charge your phone, computer or tablet.

And, not only will it keep you charged, it will offer you unlimited comfort.  The Ashley Krismen Collection 7810215 Sofa offers a power adjustable headrest and footrest.  In addition, it is made with 100% chenille-woven polyester for a soft and cushy feel.  Furthermore, the seat cushions are made with high-resiliency foam with a top layer of thick poly fiber.

This reclining sofa offers dual-sided reclining while the middle seat stays stationary.  And, the back and seat cushions also stay stationary as they are attached to the couch.

Lastly, this sofa measures 85 inches long, 45 inches wide, 45 inches tall and weighs 284 pounds.

Pros:

You really can’t go wrong with a USB port, that’s one of the huge advantages of this couch.  And then all you need is the best TV tray and you literally won’t have to go anywhere.  

Furthermore, this couch is solid and well-constructed.  It is ultra comfortable and with the chenille-woven polyester, it’s going to hold up well.

Cons:

Like many reclining sofas, the middle does not recline.

In addition, charcoal is the only color offered at this moment.  However, it is a great color which tends to blend in well with many different environments and decor.

 

VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa

VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa

This next pick for best reclining sofa is a great option for people on either end of the height and weight spectrum.  The VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa features wide seats with a depth of 19.69 inches.  So, there will be plenty of room to accommodate just about anyone.

This reclining sofa is made of high-quality leather with the sides covered in PU.  According to Patch, PU is a split leather with a layer of polyurethane.  And, the main benefit to this is it is easy clean.  Additionally, it has the appearance of 100% leather, so it’s going to look great.

The VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa offers a backrest and a footrest, all controlled by a handle located on the side of the couch.

This reclining sofa comes in your choice of sizes:  36 inches by 37 inches by 40 inches, 57 inches by 37 inches by 40 inches and 78 inches by 37 inches by 40 inches.

Pros:

Because of the excellent seat depth and width, this couch will comfortably accommodate everyone.

Furthermore, the leather is top-notch and the VIVA HOME Reclining Sofa is well-constructed.

Cons:

There’s not much to complain about with this couch.  If anything, you might be too comfortable and that could lead to laziness.

But, like a lot of reclining sofas out there, the middle seat does not recline.  So, someone is going to have to go without. 

 

Homelegance Nicasio Contemporary All Genuine Leather Power Reclining Sofa

Homelegance Nicasio Contemporary All Genuine Leather Power Reclining Sofa

If you’re looking for the whole setup, this pick gives you the option of a reclining sofa, loveseat and chair.  However, if you’re just looking for a reclining sofa, these options all come separately.  

The Homelegance Nicasio Contemporary All Genuine Leather Power Reclining Sofa is extremely comfortable, featuring low-profile arm rests and overstuffed cushions.  Furthermore, because this reclining sofa is made with high quality leather, it’s going to increase the comfort all that much more.  And, the sides of the couch are made of PU aka split leather, which is matched to look like the seat cushions.  

This reclining sofa offers a power reclining system which you can operate from either side of the couch.  And, this will allow you to fully recline the seats with just a push of a button.

The Homelegance Nicasio Contemporary Power Reclining Sofa measures 87 inches long, 37 inches deep and 39.25 inches tall.  It comes in your choice of 2 colors:  Black or Dark Brown.

Pros:

This reclining sofa offers a high back and low-profile arm rests, making it extremely comfortable.  In addition, the cushions are plush which only adds to the comfort.

And, the motor on this power reclining sofa is extremely quiet.

Furthermore, assembly is easy and won’t require any tools.

Cons:

There are a couple of complaints that a bar was bent during the shipping process.  However, this is easy to straighten out and was not considered a deal breaker.

In addition, the armrests are attached with velcro.  And, you may hear the velcro shifting around at times.

 

Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional

Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional

This pick for best reclining sofa is an extremely functional option.  And, this is because you can lounge or recline.  Not only that, it also comes with storage which is convenient for storing blankets and pillows.

The Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional comes with a chaise which features storage inside.  And, with this pick, you have your option of a right or left chaise sectional to fit in the space you’re working with.

In addition, this sofa will recline only on the far side – away from the chaise lounge.  So, you have one of each seat options with this couch:  Lounge, stationary and recline.

This reclining sofa is constructed with a hardwood frame and soft, polyester upholstery.  Furthermore, the Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional comes in your choice of colors.  And, with these colors comes different fabrics and textures.  Choose between Chestnut Brown, Fawn Tan, Flagstone, Glacial Gray, Silica Sand, Riverfront Brown, Chestnut Brown, Beige, Dusk Beige, Grey, Moonlight Grey, Oatmeal or Warm Oatmeal.

In addition, the Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional comes in your choice of styles and sizes:  Right Sectional, Left Sectional, Loveseat and Armchair.  However, the only options that recline are the Left and Right Sectional.  But, these other options will make for a great set it you’re looking to outfit your whole space.

This reclining sofa measures 32 inches wide, 89 inches long and 36 inches tall.  It weighs 198 pounds.

Pros:

This pick for best reclining sofa is a great space-saving option.  Furthermore, the Serta Palisades Reclining Sectional is firm, yet supportive.  In addition, the upholstery is soft and 2 matching throw pillows are included.

This sofa recliner is easy to assemble, with some consumers saying it took them less than an hour.

Cons:

The seat lacks depth, so this is a great pick for those who are on the shorter end of the spectrum.  However, this isn’t so great for those who are taller.  So, if you’re an upwards of 6 feet tall, you might want to choose a different couch.

Furthermore, the cushions on this reclining sofa are not reversible.  But, the good news is, the upholstery is removable and is washable.

Lastly, there are a few complaints with the quality of zippers and sagging seat cushions.  In addition, there are complaints that the seat cushions slide when you’re sitting on them.

 

Homelegance 9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa

Homelegance 9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa

Our final pick for best reclining sofa is a handsome sofa that is great for traditional decor.  The Homelegance 9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa features classic rolled arms and nail head tufted accents.

This reclining sofa is made of bonded leather, which means it’s a mixture of 74% polyester, 18% leather and 8% cotton.  Furthermore, the sides of the couch are made of PU, which is a blend of 90% polyester and 10% cotton.

The Homelegance 9668BRW-3 Double Reclining Sofa offers a lever on either side of the couch to operate the recline feature.  And, like most reclining sofas, the middle seat stays stationary.

And, if you’re looking for a sofa set, this style comes with the following options:  Chair, Loveseat, Power RCLN Chair and Power RCLN Sofa.  Furthermore, it comes in your choice of Brown or Black.

Finally, the Homelegance Double Reclining Sofa measures 90 inches long, 38.5 inches wide and 40 inches tall.

Pros:

This is a whole lot of couch for the price.  And, it’s a fantastic pick for those on a budget.

Furthermore, it’s sturdy and durable, so expect it to last for a while.

Cons:

Because it is made with bonded leather as opposed to 100% leather, it isn’t going to last as long as leather would.  You will eventually see wear and tear with the bonded leather.  However, again, for the price, this is a fantastic deal.

In addition, if you’re 6’0 or above, you may want to consider another couch – taller consumers have complained that they don’t fit quite right.

Lastly, some consumers have complained about foot rest malfunction after months of owning this sofa.  And, again, this is a budget option, so be aware that you may be in the same boat.  Especially if you tend to make good use of your couch.

best murphy bed

Best Murphy Bed – Top Wall and Cabinet Picks

If you’re looking for the best Murphy bed, or perhaps the best solution for a stow-a-way bed, we scouted the earth for the best Murphy and cabinet beds and came away with 6 amazing picks.

However, if you’re open to additional solutions, feel free to check out our picks for the best sofa beds, the best futons and the best folding beds.

But, if you’re set on a Murphy bed or a cabinet bed, then all you need to do is decide which one of these is going to work for your needs.

So, which solution is right for you?

If you already know exactly what you’re looking for, check out our picks for 6 best Murphy beds and Cabinet bed.  If you would like some assistance, we have a Buyer’s Guide at the end of this post to help you decide which solution is best for you.

 

Best Murphy Bed & Cabinet Bed

 MaterialSpecsPrice
Bestar Nebula Full Wall Bed
Bestar
Nebula Full Wall Bed
Particle Board
Euroslat Mattress Support
Dual Piston System
Mattress Not Included
Boxspring Not Required
Color Options
Full
Queen
BurlesonHomeFurnishings Coastline Solid Wood Murphy Hideaway Bed
BurlesonHomeFurnishings
Coastline Solid Wood Murphy Hideaway Bed
Solid Wood
Handmade
Slat Mattress Support
Nightstands
Mattress Not Included
Boxspring Not Required
Full
Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed
Arason Enterprises
Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed
MDF
Wood Veneer
Memory Foam Mattress
Storage Drawers
Style Options
Queen
Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed with Storage
Bestar
Edge Queen Wall Bed with Storage
Particle Board
Euroslat Mattress Support
Dual Piston System
Mattress Not Included
Boxspring Not Required
Color Options
Queen
Bowery Hill Full Wall Bed
Bowery Hill
Full Wall Bed
Wood
Mattress Support
Mattress Not Included
Boxspring Not Required
Full
Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit Wall Bed
Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit
Vertical Mount Wall Bed
Easy Lift Piston System
Fold Up Legs
Step-By-Step Guide
Wood Not Included
Mattress Not Included
Queen

 

Best Murphy Bed & Cabinet Bed

 

Bestar Nebula Full Wall Bed

Bestar Nebula Full Wall Bed

The Bestar Nebula Full Wall Bed comes in your choice of colors and 2 sizes.  Choose between Antigua, Grey or White and a full or queen size.

This pick for best Murphy bed is made of high-density commercial-grade particle board and features a Euroslat mattress support system.  According to European Sleep Works, these flexible slat systems have numerous advantages over a box spring.  The Euroslat mattress support will adjust to the ever-changing contours of your body.  In addition, it increases air circulation and allows your mattress to breath.  Which, in turn, keeps your mattress dry and allows for a healthier sleep environment.

Therefore, with the Bestar Nebula Wall Bed, a box spring is not required.  Furthermore, a mattress is not included.  So, you will have the freedom to choose a mattress that’s right for you.

When choosing a mattress, it needs to weigh at least 70 pounds in order to keep the Murphy bed weighted down while in the open position.  In addition, this Murphy bed accommodates a mattress up to 10 inches thick.

Now, the first step in choosing the best Murphy bed for you is determining if you have the required space.  The Bestar Nebula Wall Bed needs a wall height of at least 86 inches tall.  In addition, it will need a clearance of at least 87.3 inches when the bed is extended and a clearance of 9.6 inches of space under the bed.

This Murphy bed requires some assembly, however, it is easy to install.  Furthermore, this wall bed is easy to use.  Just pull the handle and the dual piston system will allow the bed to open easily and smoothly.  Then, flip the leg down onto the floor to stabilize it.  Once you’re ready to pack up, just reverse the process.

Pros:

The Bestar Nebula Wall Bed is very sturdy and durable.  And, because it’s made with high-quality partical board, this bed is going to last a long time.

Furthermore, assembly is fairly easy, but it will take about a day to put together.  However, there is an option for expert assembly for those who don’t want to be bothered.

Cons:

Of course, we would all love to have real wood instead of particle board.  And, if you’re set on real wood, our next pick for best Murphy bed is handmade with solid wood and is absolutely gorgeous.

 

BurlesonHomeFurnishings Coastline Solid Wood Murphy Hideaway Bed

BurlesonHomeFurnishings Coastline Solid Wood Murphy Hideaway Bed

This pick for best Murphy bed is full of character and absolutely stunning.  The BurlesonHomeFurnishings Coastline Solid Wood Murphy Hideaway Bed is handmade with solid wood with a beautiful dark stain finish.

This Murphy bed features a slat mattress support system which will give comfort and support without the need for a box spring.  In addition, this unit doesn’t come with a mattress.  However, that gives you the freedom to find the perfect mattress just for you.  And, with this pick, it can hold a mattress up to 10 inches thick.

The BurlesonHomeFurnishings Coastline Hideaway Bed comes with 2 nightstands which are conveniently built into the doors.  Just unlatch and the nightstands will easily fold out.

This Murphy bed comes in a full size and measures 69 inches wide, 21.5 inches deep and 87 inches tall.  When opened, this bed measures 117 inches wide, 84 inches deep and 87 inches tall.

Pros:

What can we say, this piece is absolutely gorgeous.  It is made of solid wood and is extremely durable.  And, this is a piece that’s going to last a lifetime.

Furthermore, we love nightstands and the additional thought that went into those.

Cons:

We can’t say this is a con, but it’s going to take some heavy lifting to get this Murphy bed where you want it.  Because the BurlesonHomeFurnishings Hideaway Bed is made of solid wood, it is heavy.

 

Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed

Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed

This pick for best cabinet bed is a great budget option.  This is because the Arason Enterpirises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed is an all-inclusive solution.

This cabinet bed comes with a tri-fold memory foam mattress.  In order for this mattress to fit in the cabinet, it folds down like an accordion.  And, this mattress is 6 inches thick with 4 inches of base foam, 2 inches of memory foam and will hold up to 500 pounds.

The Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet bed is made with high-quality MDF and real wood veneer.  And, with MDF, it’s going to be sturdy and durable.

This cabinet bed features 2 drawers to store pillows and bedding when not in use.  In addition, the top surface offers extra storage for personal items or decor.  And, because the top features specialty hinges, it will open seamlessly without having to remove the items.

Finally, the Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed comes in a queen size and measures 64 inches wide, 24 inches deep and 43 inches tall.  It also comes in your choice of design options which you can find here.

Pros:

Because this cabinet bed comes with a mattress, this is a great pick for those who are on a budget.  In addition, the mattress is firm, yet extremely comfortable.

Furthermore, the Arason Enterprises Creden-ZzZ Cabinet Bed is a great looking piece of furniture, so you don’t have to worry about it looking cheap.

Cons:

This cabinet bed does need to be assembled, however, assembly is straightforward and easy.  But, if you choose not to be bothered, you can have expertly assembled.

In addition, this cabinet bed is made of MDF and it’s not the ideal material.  However, MDF is durable and will last you awhile.  Furthermore, there is real wood veneer so the appearance of this cabinet bed looks great.

 

Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed with Storage

Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed with Storage

This is another pick for best Murphy bed by Bestar, however, this particular option comes with additional features you might find appealing.  The Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed comes with 2-21 inch storage units on either side of the bed.  And, these storage units are great for knick-knacks, as well as, storing bedding.

This Murphy bed is made of high-quality, commercial-grade particle board.  And, like we mentioned previously, because this particle board is high quality, this bed is durable and very sturdy.

The Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed with Storage features a Euroslat mattress support system which will offer comfort and support without the need for a box spring.  And, this Murphy bed does not come with a mattress, so you’re free to choose the perfect mattress for you.  Just make sure the mattress you choose is no more than 12 inches thick and weighs no less than 70 pounds.

This Murphy bed also features a dual piston system which allows for seemless opening and closing of the bed.  And, to use this bed, simply pull the handle towards you and flip the leg down.  When you’re ready to pack things up, just reverse the process.

The Bestar Edge Queen Wall Bed comes in your choice of colors:  Brown or White.  And, this unit as a whole measures 107.1 inches wide, 20.1 inches deep and 89.4 inches tall.

Pros:

This Murphy bed looks great and functions wonderfully.  And, most importantly, there are a lot of satisfied consumers.

Cons:

The assembly is going to take a lot of time.  However, if you have it professionally assembled, it’s no sweat off your back.

 

Bowery Hill Full Wall Bed

Bowery Hill Full Wall Bed

This is another option for a Murphy bed that’s constructed of wood, rather than particle board.  In addition, the Bowery Hill Full Wall Bed comes with a scratch, stain and burn resistant melamine finish.

This Murphy bed features a Euroslat mattress support system which will automatically adjust to the contours of your body.  Furthermore, this slat system is designed to increase airflow which allows for a healthier sleeping environment.  And, because it features a Euroslat mattress support system, that means you won’t need to worry about a box spring.

However, you will need to provide a mattress, as this Murphy bed does not come with one.  And, when choosing a mattress, make sure the mattress is no more than 10 inches thick and weighs between 70 and 95 pounds.  In addition, the dimensions of the mattress should be no more than 54 inches wide by 75 inches long.

When considering this option for a Murphy bed, you must make sure you have enough space.  The height of your ceiling needs to be no less than 91 inches tall for installation purposes.  And, the ceiling needs to be no less than 93 inches to install the crown molding.  Furthermore, when the bed is extended, you will need a clearance of at least 93.4 inches.  And, the bed needs a clearance underneath of at least 9.5 inches.

Pros:

The Bowery Hill Full Wall Bed is easy to assemble and mounting it to the wall is fairly simple.

Furthermore, this Murphy bed has a dual piston system which allows you to safely open and close this bed.

Cons:

This Murphy bed will take some time to assemble.  However, the assembly is fairly easy.  And, you always have the option of hiring a professional.

 

Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit Wall Bed

Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit Vertical Mount Wall Bed

Our final pick for best Murphy bed is one for those who don’t mind getting their hands dirty.  The Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit Vertical Mount Wall Bed is also one that you can tailor to your exact decor needs.

Because with this DIY Murphy bed kit, you get to choose your own wood.  In addition to the wood, you will need some edging tape and wood screws.  And, what this kit does come with is an easy lift piston system and a pair of fold-up legs.

Furthermore, the Easy DIY Murphy Bed Kit includes 3 guidebooks:  Step-by-Step Cutting Guide, Construction Guide and Assembly Guide.  In addition, it thankfully comes with a Step-by-Step DVD and an Illustrated Booklet Package.

This Murphy bed kit also comes with a mattress quick-release strap that will help keep the mattress stable.  However, you’re going to need a mattress once you have this all set up.  This Murphy bed requires a queen size mattress that measures 60 inches wide and 80 inches long, with a maximum height of 12 inches.  Also, the mattress should weigh between 60 and 85 pounds.

Pros:

This is a great pick for those that love projects.  And, it’s fairly simple to put together.  However, the toughest part will be cutting the wood in the correct dimensions.  But, you can have the wood cut for you if you don’t have the required tools or if you just want to make things easy on yourself.

The other aspect we like with this DIY option is you can design this exactly how you want it.  And, there’s nothing better than having something you designed and constructed yourself.

Cons:

Although this Murphy bed kit states it is easy to build, it isn’t for the faint of heart.  It’s going to require, at the very least, basic woodworking skills.  However, we suggest having more than basic woodworking skills.

 

Best Murphy Bed and Cabinet Bed Buyer’s Guide

There are a few questions to ask yourself before making the big purchase:

Should I go with a Murphy bed or a cabinet bed?

For decor sense, either one of these is going to look great.

The benefit of the Murphy bed is it tends to have an appearance that it’s flush with the wall.  Or, in some cases, it looks like a cabinet that blends in with its environment.  Whereas the cabinet bed tends to look more like a piece of furniture, as it’s shaped as a cabinet.  And, the cabinet bed is more functional in that you can use the countertop for decor, such as picture frames or vases, or personal items.

As far as comfort goes, the Murphy bed wins hands down.  And, this is because the Murphy bed allows the mattress to store in its original shape.

With the cabinet bed, it needs to fold in order to store it inside the cabinet.  However, the pick we have for best cabinet bed is a firm and comfortable mattress, something you don’t often find with a cabinet bed.  So, it’s still worth considering this option for a solution.

If I choose a Murphy bed, should I consider a DIY option?

Our DIY option is for those looking to save money.  That’s the plus side.  And, in the end, we aren’t quiet sure it saves all that much.  Because with the DIY option, you’re going to need to buy the wood in order to build it.

Furthermore, you will need basic woodworking skills and the required tools on hand to accomplish this.  So, for those that enjoy woodwork and a personal touch, this is a fabulous option to consider.

For those that failed workshop class in middle school, your best bet is to go with a Murphy bed or cabinet bed.

Is there anything else I should know about choosing a Murphy or cabinet bed?

Like we stated previously, most of our picks for Best Murphy bed do not come with a mattress.  And, this gives you the free reign over choosing the right type of mattress for you.  Furthermore, these picks do not require a box spring, so you really only have to focus on purchasing a mattress.

However, if you’re looking for an all-inclusive Murphy bed, we have a fantastic bed with an extremely comfortable and supportive mattress.  Also, our pick for best cabinet bed is also an all-inclusive option.  And, these picks are great for those who don’t want to fuss over a mattress.

best tower fan

Best Tower Fan – 5 Quiet Oscillating Fans

If you’re looking for the best tower fan that’s both oscillating and quiet, we have good news for you.  We tested and reviewed a ton of fans and came away with 5 of the most highly regarded picks on the market.

And, not only are these fans both oscillating, quiet and highly regarded, each pick has additional features you may find to be functional for your lifestyle.  For instance, one of our picks not only has a tilt feature for additional customized air circulation, it also offers 5 different speed settings.

Now, if that doesn’t sound like your cup of coffee, there is another pick which features 3 fans which are all independently controlled.  So, you can circulate the air in one direction while using the lower fan to circulate the air for your pets.  Anyway you choose to use this particular fan, it will definitely deliver cool air when and where you need it and to whom needs it.

That all being said, choosing the best tower fan that is both oscillating and quiet doesn’t have to be painful.  The pain is our job, and the pleasure is yours.  After hours upon hours of research and sifting through consumer reviews, we are pleased to present our picks for the best oscillating tower fans.

 

Best Tower Fan

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Soleus Air Tower Fan with Remote Control
Soleus
Air Tower Fan with Remote Control
Oscillating
3 Speeds
7.5 Hour Timer
Remote Control
LED Indicator Lights
35"
Seville Classics Ultraslimline Energy-Saving Tilt Tower Fan
Seville Classics
Ultraslimline Energy-Saving Tilt Tower Fan
Oscillating
5 Speeds
3 Tilt Positions
Remote Control
LED Control Panel
40"
Ozeri 3x Tower Fan
Ozeri
3x Tower Fan
Oscillating
3 Fans
3 Speeds
7.5 Hour Timer
Remote Control
LED Control Panel
44"
Lasko 52 Energy Efficient Oscillating Tower Fan
Lasko
52 Energy Efficient Oscillating Tower Fan
Oscillating
3 Speeds
Directional Louvers
7.5 Hour Timer
Adjustable Height
Remote Control
52"
Westinghouse Tower Fan with Remote
Westinghouse
Tower Fan with Remote
Oscillating
3 Speeds
8 Hour Timer
Remote Control
40"

 

Best Tower Fan

 

Soleus Air Tower Fan with Remote Control

Soleus Air Tower Fan with Remote Control

Our first pick for best tower fan oscillates in a side to side fashion.  The Soleus Air Tower Fan offers 3 fan speeds and a sleep mode speed.  These fan speeds include the following:  Regular, Natural and Simulates the Wind.

The “Simulates the Wind” fan speed will work on all three speeds, and this will produce the maximum amount of air flow.  The “Natural” speed will deliver a medium-force type of air flow, while the “Regular” speed delivers a light air flow.  And, when you set this fan to “Sleep Mode,” this will lower the fan speed to a light and quiet breeze so it won’t disturb you while you sleep.

The Soleus Air Tower Fan features an LED indicator display where you can control the settings.  Additionally, there is a remote control where you can conveniently control the settings from afar.

This oscillating tower fan offers a 7.5 hour timer, which you can set manually.  Once the time is up, this fan will automatically shutoff.  And, this is to protect the fan from overheating and prevent any unfortunate mishaps.

The Soleus Air Tower Fan measures 9.2 inches long, 11.2 inches wide and 34.47 inches tall.  It weighs roughly 8 pounds.

Pros:

This pick for best tower fan has a reduced vibration motor which makes it extremely quiet.  And, if it’s not quiet enough for you, you can always set it on sleep mode which will reduce the noise even further while you’re resting.

Furthermore, this tower fan is very stable, so you won’t have to worry about knocking it over.  And, this fan is also slim in size, so it won’t take up too much space.

Cons:

A few consumers have complained that this fan rattles.  However, it is important to note that most consumers have not reported this issue, rather they have left glowing reviews about how quiet this fan is.

 

Seville Classics Ultraslimline Energy-Saving Tilt Tower Fan

Seville Classics Ultraslimline Energy-Saving Tilt Tower Fan

Our next pick for best tower fan offers unlimited angles to get that airflow exactly where you need it.  The Seville Classics Ultraslimline Energy-Saving Tower Fan offers 55 degrees of angles with 3 different tilt positions.  These tilt positions measure at 0 degrees, 6 degrees and 12 degrees.

Furthermore, this tower fan offers 5 speeds which range from low to high.  And, it has 3 breeze settings:  Constant, Natural and Sleep.  So, when you add all of this up, you receive 45 different levels of air circulation.  And, this allows you to customize the airflow to deliver it right where you need it. 

The Seville Classics Ultraslimline Tower Fan features an LED control panel where you can control the settings.  And, if you’re across the room on your favorite chair, you can also control the settings via remote control.  Furthermore, the Seville Classics Ultraslimline Tower Fan has a 7.5 hour timer with automatic shutoff which is controlled via control panel or remote. 

This tower fan is energy-efficient and will allow you to save up to 50% in energy consumption.

Lastly, the Seville Classics Ultraslimline Tower Fan measures 13 inches long, 11 inches wide and 40 inches tall.  And, it weighs roughly 11 pounds.

Pros:

This fan has offers so many different settings, you can customize it to your exact needs.

In addition, it is quiet, and when it is on the lowest speed, it is near silent.  So, you can rest easy.

Cons:

If you’re looking to distribute air throughout a large room, this probably won’t do the trick.  This is an energy-efficient tower fan and it operates on a 25 watt motor.  Therefore, this motor can handle small to mid-sized rooms but not much larger.

 

Ozeri 3x Tower Fan

Ozeri 3x Tower Fan

This fan has a large fan base.  And, when we talk about fan base, we’re not talking about the actual fan.  We are talking about consumers.  Consumers love this fan.

The Ozeri 3x Tower Fan has 3 separately controlled fans with 3 different fan speeds.  This will give you 9 customized levels of airflow.  Furthermore, this fan offers a wide range of airflow at an oscillating 90 degrees.

Furthermore, this tower fan has 3 programs that are specially designed to help you relax and fall asleep.  And, did we mention sleep?  The Ozeri 3x Tower Fan features noise cancellation technology.  In addition, it offers canted fan blades that further help reduce blade noise.

To use this tower fan, simply control it via the touch-sensitive LED control panel or the included remote control.  And, if you would like to set the time, this fan has a 7.5 hour timer and an automatic shutoff.

Finally, this fan measures 8 inches long, 3 inches wide, 44 inches tall and it weighs 13 pounds.  Furthermore, the company claims this is among the world’s thinnest fans at mere 3 inches wide.

Pros:

Where do we begin?  This oscillating tower fan has everything.

We will start with the 3 separately controlled fans that are perfect to accommodate 3 people at once.  Especially if these 3 people never agree on which direction the wind blows.

So, you can set one fan in your direction and the other fan in your loved one’s direction.  And, you can use the 3rd fan to accommodate your pets.  Because pets need to keep cool, too.

Another notable aspect about this fan is it puts out a lot of air.  So, if you’re looking to cool down a large room, this fan is up to the task.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained this fan is rather noisy.  However, if you put it on a lower setting, that will help to reduce the noise.  And, the lowest level should be quiet enough to sleep with.  

Furthermore, the display lights on the fan are a little bright.  You may take this into consideration if you’re one of those people who like it dark when you sleep.

 

Lasko 52 Energy Efficient Oscillating Tower Fan

Lasko 52 Energy Efficient Oscillating Tower Fan

This is the tallest oscillating fan on our list.  The Lasko Energy Efficient Oscillating Tower Fan is 52 inches high, which is more than adequate for a space with taller ceilings.  Furthermore, this fan is adjustable to a height of 41 inches to accommodate a shorter space.

This pick for best tower fan has louvers which you can direct the airflow either up or down.  In addition, this fan features 3 energy-efficient speeds all adjustable via control panel or via remote control.

The Lasko 52 Energy Efficient oscillating Tower Fan has a programmable timer which you can set for up to 7.5 hours.

Finally, this tower fan measures 15 inches long, 15 inches wide and 52 inches tall.  It weighs 12 pounds and comes with a convenient handle for easy portability.

Pros:

The Lasko Oscillating Tower Fan is a great choice for a no-frills fan and it’s extremely quiet.

Furthermore, this fan is adjustable for tall or shorter spaces.  Making this a great choice for those who have a different levels of a playing field.

Cons:

While this fan works great for small to mid-sized spaces, because it is energy-efficient, it isn’t going to cool down a large space.  

 

Westinghouse Tower Fan with Remote

Westinghouse Tower Fan with Remote

Our final pick for best oscillating tower fan is another choice for those who don’t need all the frills.  The Westinghouse Tower Fan features 3 speeds with wide circulating oscillation.

This tower fan is controlled either by a digital LED display with soft-touch buttons or by remote control.  And, this tower fan offers a cubbyhole for the remote control in back.  This cubbyhole also doubles as a handle for easy portability.

The Westinghouse Tower Fan has an 8 hour timer which you can program manually.  In addition, the Westinghouse comes with a 5 foot cord so you have some leeway to move it around.

Finally, this tower fan measures 9.6 inches long, 8.3 inches wide and 36.3 inches tall.  And, it is rather lightweight at 9 pounds.

Pros:

The Westinghouse Tower Fan delivers quite a bit of air.  And, it will easily cool down a space in the mid-sized range.

Furthermore, this tower fan is rather quiet on all levels of operation.  However, if you want it extremely quiet, the lowest level of speed is where you’re going to get it.

Cons:

The blue LED lights are rather bright.  So, for sleeping purposes, you may want to consider this annoying oversight.  Or, you can always use the ever-handy duck tape to dim the light.

best fireplace grate

Best Fireplace Grate – Cast Iron and Steel

Are you looking for the best fireplace grate?  Fireplace grates are an absolute necessity for every fireplace.  Not only do they keep the firewood in place, but they also help to increase airflow.

And, this is important because you want to maximize your wood-burning experience.  When you use a grate, it will increase the burn-time of the firewood, increase the heat output and produce a cleaner burning fire.

So, what should you look for in the best fireplace grate?  Well, first, material is important.  And, the best materials for a fireplace grate are steel and cast iron.

best fireplace grate

And that poses the next question, which is better?  Steel or cast iron?  According to DenGarden, steel fireplace grates are less efficient and generally do not last as long as cast iron.  However, if you choose a steel fireplace grate in a heavier-grade, it can last as long as cast iron.

Furthermore, stainless steel fireplace grates are typically used for wood only.  The bars of the grate are spread apart wider, and therefore, they are not able to accommodate coal.  So, if you’re looking to build a fire with coal, a cast iron fireplace grate is the best way to go.  This is because most cast iron grates have small divides which can accommodate coal without the coal falling through the gaps.

Another quality you should look for in the best fireplace grate is weight.  The heavier the grate, the better off you will be in the long run.  Heavy grates tend to be more durable and more fire retardant.  So, if you choose a fireplace grate above 20 pounds, it is going to last you a while.  And, the heavier the grate you choose, the more years of use you can tack on.

Furthermore, it is important to note that fireplace grates come in all sizes.  So, in this case, if you’re going with a small fireplace grate, a weight of 17 pounds is still going to be a medium-duty grate and will be durable enough for years to come.  But, if you’re an everyday fire starter, we do suggest going with a heavier weight than that.    

Finally, if you’re looking for some fireplace tools to go along with your fireplace grate, check out our picks for top fireplace tools here

   

Best Fireplace Grate

 MaterialSpecsPrice
Grate Wall of Fire Model M-6 High Efficiency Smoke-Free Fireplace Grate
Grate Wall of Fire
Model M-6 High Efficiency Smoke-Free Fireplace Grate
Steel
Cast Iron Finials
26" x 15"
Liberty Foundry HY-C G500-24 Sampson Series Cast Iron Fireplace Grate
Liberty Foundry
HY-C G500-24 Sampson Series Cast Iron Fireplace Grate
Cast Iron20" x 16"
24" x 16"
18" x 16"
20" x 20"
20" x 14"
Heritage Products Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate
Heritage Products
Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate
Steel18" x 14"
24" x 14"
27" x 14"
33" x 14"
36" x 14"
Amagabeli Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate
Amagabeli
Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate
Cast Iron22" x 11"
24" x 11"
Liberty Foundry HY-C G22-4 G-Series Franklin Style Cast Iron Fireplace Grate
Liberty Foundry
HY-C G22-4 G-Series Franklin Style Cast Iron Fireplace Grate
Cast Iron17" x 12" x 6.7"
22" x 12" x 5"
22" x 12" x 6.5"
27" x 12" x 6.5"
Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace Grate
Uniflame
Hexagonal Fireplace Grate
Steel24" x 24"
27" x 27"
30" x 30"
36" x 36"

 

Best Fireplace Grate

Grate Wall of Fire Model M-6 High Efficiency Smoke-Free Fireplace Grate

Grate Wall of Fire Model M-6 High Efficiency Smoke-Free Fireplace Grate

Our first pick for best fireplace grate is a high-efficiency option that increases heat output.  The Grate Wall of Fire Model M-6 High Efficiency Smoke-Free Fireplace Grate not only increases heat output, it eliminates smoke output inside the home.

This fireplace grate works by resting on the rear wall of the fireplace.  Simply place the wood between the wall and the grate and you will have a clean burning fire in no time.

The Grate Wall of Fire High Efficiency Fireplace Grate is made with heavy-duty steel construction and comes with decorative cast iron finials which are removable in case the design doesn’t match your decor.  And, the steel constructed bars are .75 inches of solid steel.  

This fireplace grate measures 26 inches wide, 14 inches deep and 15 inches tall.  Therefore, the back wall of your fireplace needs to measure at least 26 inches wide and the depth of the fireplace should be at least 16 inches deep.  Furthermore, the entry to the fireplace should have enough depth so you’re able to load the firewood.

Pros:

The Grate Wall of Fire High Efficiency Fireplace Grate gets absolute rave reviews.  The most appreciated aspect of this fireplace grate is the amount of heat it delivers.  It will deliver a lot of heat in a short amount of time, which is perfect for those cold winter nights.

In addition, this fireplace grate eliminates smoke from coming into the house.  And, for those of us that have that issue, this fireplace grate is a lifesaver.

Cons:

Because this fireplace grate leans up against the back of the fireplace, it can cause brick and mortar failure overtime.  The solution to this is, The Grate Wall of Fire offers a reflective fireback to protect the wall from heat damage.  This fireback not only protects the rear of the fireplace, it is reflective, so therefore, it will reflect heat back into the room.  And, just like that, this fireplace grate just became even more efficient.  You can find the reflective fireback here.

Liberty Foundry HY-C G500-24 Sampson Series Cast Iron Fireplace Grate

Liberty Foundry HY-C G500-24 Sampson Series Cast Iron Fireplace Grate

This next pick for best fireplace grate is another high-efficiency option.  The Liberty Foundry HY-C G500-24 Sampson Series Cast Iron Fireplace Grate is designed in a way which allows you to combine wood with coal and receive air from all angles.  And, this allows the fire to burn cleanly while increasing the heat output.

This fireplace grate is made with heavy-duty cast iron and features removable 2.5 inch tall legs.  However, if you need to remove them for more clearance, this fireplace grate is extremely stable on its own.

Lastly, the Liberty Foundry Cast Iron Fireplace Grate comes in your choice of 5 different sizes:  20 inches by 16 inches, 24 inches by 16 inches, 18 inches by 16 inches, 20 inches by 20 inches or 20 inches by 14 inches.

Pros:

First of all, this fireplace grate is extremely attractive.  Most consumers can’t get enough of how well this fireplace grate presents itself.

Furthermore, this grate is made of solid cast iron and is extremely sturdy.  So, if you’re going to burn coal, this grate is up the challenge.  If you just want to burn wood, this is a great alternative to some of the steel fireplace grates which are designed in this same classic fashion.

Cons:

A few consumers felt the assembly is difficult and the instructions are hard to understand.  Patience is advised.

Heritage Products Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate

Heritage Products Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate

This next pick is designed to use for wood only.  The Heritage Products Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate features a wide construction with wide-set bars.

This fireplace grate is made with heavy-duty steel construction with .375 inches by 1 inch thick bars.  And, having bars this thick, you won’t have to worry about warping.  

The Heritage Products Heavy Duty Steel Fireplace Grate is tapered to ensure it fits most fireplaces.  And, for added assurance on getting the right fit, this fireplace grate comes in your choice of sizes:  18 inches by 14 inches, 24 inches by 14 inches, 27 inches by 14 inches, 33 inches by 14 inches and 36 inches by 14 inches.

Pros:

This fireplace grate is heavy and durable.  And, when it comes to heavy-duty steel, this grate will last you a long time.

Furthermore, it comes in an array of sizes, enough to accommodate just about every fireplace out there.

Cons:

Every once in a while we review a product where we can find no defect.  And, as much as we tried to pick this fireplace grate apart, we couldn’t find one thing wrong with it.

 

Amagabeli Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate

Amagabeli Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate

This pick for best fireplace grate is designed to be used for wood only.  And, this grate is made with wrought iron, as opposed to cast iron.  So, it’s not going to be as durable as cast iron, but it is made with thick construction and will handle a lot of heat.

The Amagabeli Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate features 7 steel bars within a v-shaped rack.  This rack is processed with electroforged grating which seals up cracks, increasing durability.

This fireplace grate comes in your choice of 2 sizes:  22 inches long and 11.25 inches wide or 24 inches long and 7.5 inches wide.  Both sizes are a good weight at approximately 20 pounds.

Pros:

The Amagabeli Black Wrought Iron Fireplace Log Grate is heavy-duty and durable enough to handle an outdoor firepit.

Furthermore, it features a classic design and will blend well in just about any room or in any yard.

Cons:

Because it is made of wrought iron as opposed to cast iron, this may not be durable for an everyday fire starter.  It would last you a while, but probably not as long as a cast iron fireplace grate would.

Liberty Foundry HY-C G22-4 G-Series Franklin Style Cast Iron Fireplace Grate

Liberty Foundry HY-C G22-4 G-Series Franklin Style Cast Iron Fireplace Grate

The best aspect of this fireplace grate is it’s all one piece.  The Liberty Foundry Franklin Style Fireplace Grate is made with one solid piece of cast iron and sits on 4-inch cast-on legs.

And, this grate can burn both coal and wood because it is made of cast iron and designed with smaller gaps. 

The Liberty Foundry Franklin Style Fireplace Grate measures 12 inches deep and is designed for smaller fireplaces. It comes in your choice of lengths:  17 inches, 22 inches or 27 inches.

Pros:

Because this fireplace grate is made with heavy-duty cast iron, it is going to last through a lot of fires.

Additionally, this is a perfect size for smaller-sized fireplaces and works also great for an outdoor firepit.

Cons:

The legs on the Liberty Foundry Fireplace Grate are rather short, which is great for low-ceiling fireplaces.  However, because the legs are short, it doesn’t get as much airflow underneath and the coal accumulation can suffer because of it.

Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace Grate

Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace Grate

Our final pick for best fireplace grate is designed for wider fireplaces.  In addition, it is also designed in a hexagon shape for maximum airflow.

The Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace Grate is constructed with 100% stainless steel with a black finish.  And, because it is stainless steel with wide set bars, this fireplace grate is for wood only.

The Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace Grate comes in your choice of 4 different sizes:  24 inches by 24 inches, 27 inches by 27 inches, 30 inches by 30 inches and 36 inches by 36 inches.

Pros:

This fireplace grate is solidly built and extremely durable.

Additionally, the hexagon design is a brilliant feature because it allows for a whole lot of airflow.  And, this means more efficient burning time.

Cons:

The legs of the Uniflame Hexagonal Fireplace are rather short.  So, this deters some coal buildup which tends to extend the life of the fire.

Furthermore, this fireplace grate is not designed for outdoor use.

Best Fireplace Tools and Wrought Iron Sets

When searching for the best fireplace tools, it’s best to start with your fireplace in mind.  Or rather, the whole setup you have going on.

From a design standpoint, choosing the right fireplace tools to match your fireplace screen and your grate, as well as your room decor, is imperative to keeping the aesthetic of a room with a fireplace view.  So, if you have sleek lines going on and a contemporary set up, you will want to choose a modern set of fireplace tools.  If you have a log cabin-esque atmosphere going on, or perhaps some country decor, you will want to go for a more traditional-style of fireplace tools.

best fireplace tools

The next step to picking out the best fireplace tools is durability.  You will be handling hot coals and firewood with theses tools, so whatever you choose needs to be able to take a beating and a burning.  And, our 6 picks for best fireplace tools are more than up for this task as they are all made of heavy wrought iron or heavy-duty metal.  So, we’ve made this part of the process of choosing the best fireplace tools easy for you.  

Additionally, fireplace tools should be comfortable to hold.  So, with a selection of fireplace tools featuring ergonomic handles or smooth rectangular-shaped handles, you will be comfortably poking the fire without the onset of hand fatigue.

And, of course, the best fireplace tools need to have a happy consumers.  Therefore, we only chose the highest quality fireplace tools with the best consumer reviews.  So, our final picks for best fireplace tools, are tried and true and occupy happy homes.

Lastly, if you’re looking for a fireplace grate to go with a set of fireplace tools, you can find our top picks and a perfect match here.

 

Best Fireplace Tools

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Plow & Hearth 36164-Brz 5 Piece
Plow & Hearth
36164-Brz 5 Piece
Wrought Iron
4 Tools
Hand-Forged Finish
Color Options
32.5" x 7.5"
20" x 10.2"
Panacea Fireplace Tool Set 5 Piece
Panacea
Fireplace Tool Set 5 Piece
Metal
4 Tools
Soft-Mottled Gray Finish
31" x 10.9"
Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set
Pilgrim Home and Hearth
18086 Sinclair Tool Set
Metal
4 Tools
Burnished Brass Finish
29" x 10"
Minuteman International Shepherd's Hook III Fireplace Tool Set
Minuteman International
Shepherd's Hook III Fireplace Tool Set
Wrought Iron
4 Tools
Black Powder-Coated Finish
22" x 7"
26.5" x 6"
33" x 8"
38" x 10.25"
Uniflame 5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset
Uniflame
5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset
Wrought Iron
4 Tools
Black Finish
31" x 12"
Amagabelli Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece
Amagabelli
Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece
Wrought Iron
4 Tools
31" x 7.1"

 

Best Fireplace Tools

Plow & Hearth 36164-Brz 5 Piece

Plow & Hearth 36164-Brz 5 Piece

Our first pick for best fireplace tools is designed in a shepherd’s crook style.  And, this is derived from a tool used by shepherd’s to keep predators from their flock.  So, this set works well in a country or cabin-esque type of atmosphere.  And, with the simplicity of this particular design, this set can also work well in a modern environment.

The Plow & Hearth 36164-Brz 5 Piece Fireplace Tool Set is made of wrought iron and features grooved beaver tail ends.  In addition, this set is hand forged with a natural bronze finish or you have the option of choosing a black finish.

This set of fireplace tools measures 32.5 inches tall, 7.5 inches wide and it weighs roughly 16 pounds.  But, if you would like a more compact set, you can find that here.  The Plow & Hearth Compact Fireplace Tool Set measures 20 inches tall and 10.2 inches wide.  And, it weighs roughly 10 pounds.

Lastly, this set comes with 4 tools and a stand.  The tools include tongs, poker, shovel and a broom.

Pros:

The Plow & Hearth 36164-Brz 5 Piece Fireplace Tool Set features a minimal, yet classic, design that will work well with just about every decor.

Furthermore, this set is made of solid wrought iron and is more than durable enough to endure the abuse we put our fireplace tools through.  In addition, it’s durable enough to handle outdoor fires.

Cons:

There was a complaint that the brush is a little on the cheap side.  However, it is important to note, the overwhelming majority of consumers are very happy with this set of fireplace tools.

Panacea Fireplace Tool Set 5 Piece

Panacea Fireplace Tool Set 5 Piece

This set of fireplace tools boasts a modern prairie-style that will work well with contemporary decor.

The Panacea Fireplace Tool Set 5 Piece is made of heavy-duty metal with a soft-mottled gray finish.  This soft-mottled gray finish can be best described as a steel gray color.

This fireplace tool set features a rectangular frame with 4 tools.  These tools include a poker, shovel, tongs and a broom.  Furthermore, these tools come with thick, rectangular handles that are smooth to the touch.

Lastly, the Panacea Fireplace Tools Set 5 Piece measures 31 inches tall and 10.9 inches wide.  And, it weighs roughly 16 pounds.

Pros:

This fireplace set is well-built and sturdy.

Additionally, the handles are welded onto the metal shafts as opposed to screwed on, making this feature a feature which exudes quality.

Cons:

The handles are comfortable, yet rectangular.  However, they aren’t ergonomically designed which is for the preferred level of comfort.

Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set

Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set

This pick for best fireplace tools has a traditional shepherd’s hook design.  However, this particular design works well with both classic and modern decor.

The Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set is constructed of heavy-duty metal and hand-forged with a Burnished Brass finish.

This fireplace tool set features a rectangular stand with 4 tools.  These tools include a shovel, poker, tongs and a brush.

Furthermore, the Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set measures 29 inches tall and 10 inches wide.  And, it weighs 20 pounds.

Pros:

This company is well-known for making high quality products for over 65 years.  And, this fireplace tool set tells of a similar story – it is extremely durable, well-designed and well-crafted.

In addition, the handles and the stems are all one piece, which attests to the craftsmanship and the construction.

Cons:

The Pilgrim Home and Hearth 18086 Sinclair Tool Set may be a bit pricier than some of our other picks.  However, due to the quality and construction, this set is worth every penny.

 

Minuteman International Shepherd's Hook III Fireplace Tool Set

Minuteman International Shepherd’s Hook III Fireplace Tool Set

This next pick is a traditional-style fireplace set with a shepherd’s hook design.  And, this particular set works best in a country or cabin environment.

The Minuteman International Shepherd’s Hook III Fireplace Tool Set is made of forged wrought iron with a black powder-coated finish.

This fireplace set comes with a stand with 4 different tools.  These tools include a poker, shovel, hoe and a brush.

The Minuteman International Shepherd’s Hook III Tool Set comes with a base ranging from 6 inches to 10.25 inches wide and comes in 4 different heights to choose from:  22 inches, 26 inches, 33 inches and 38 inches.

Pros:

This set is offered in 4 different heights which is sure to accommodate just about every consumer.

Furthermore, this fireplace set is made of solid wrought iron and extremely durable.  For assurance, the 38 inch fireplace tool set weighs a whopping 30 pounds.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained the broom is losing some bristles.  Unfortunately, this is often the case with this type of broom.  But, losing some bristles may give it some authenticity.

 

Uniflame 5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset

Uniflame 5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset

This set of fireplace tools is a traditional shepherd’s hook design with a continuous loop handle.  And, this set will work best with traditional decor.  Furthermore, the handles and the stand are twisted to give it an added flair.

The Uniflame 5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset is made of heavy wrought iron with a black finish.

This fireplace set comes with a stand and 4 different tools.  These tools include a shovel, log lifter, poker and a brush.

The Uniflame 5 Piece Black Wrought Iron Ring Swirl Fireset weighs 19 pounds and measures 31 inches tall and 12 inches wide.

Pros:

This fireplace set is heavy-duty and on the budget friendly side.  Plus, it is made with wrought iron so you know it’s going to be durable.  Additionally, the twisted design feature gives it some extra-added durability.  

Cons:

The broom isn’t all that functional.  It can work but not all that well.  Best to keep it for looks and have another one on hand for clean up.

Amagabelli Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece

Amagabelli Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece

Our final pick for best fireplace tool set features a classic design that will work well with traditional decor.  And, with the knob design on the handle, this is one of the more comfortable picks on our list.

The Amagabelli Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece is made of black wrought iron.  It comes with a base and 4 tools to choose from:  brush, shovel, tongs and fireplace poker.

This fireplace set measures 31 inches tall and 7.1 inches wide.  It weighs roughly 11 pounds.

Lastly, the Amagabelli Rustic Fireplace Tools 5 Piece needs to be assembled upon arrival.  However, this set comes with a simple guide and assembly is extremely easy.  The total setup should take no more than 5 minutes.

Pros:

This fireplace tool set is easy to assemble.  And, once screwed in, most consumers had no issues with the parts unscrewing over time.

Additionally, this set has ergonomic designed handles which makes it comfortable to handle and eliminates hand fatigue. 

Cons:

Because it’s a budget option, you’re not going to have the heavy-duty quality of some of the other fireplace tool sets on the market.  For instance, this set only weighs roughly 11 pounds, whereas, most of our other picks weigh between 20 and 30 pounds.

Furthermore, some consumers have complained that the pieces weren’t threaded for screw-in and these consumers were not able to assemble the set.  Additionally, there were also some consumers that had issues with the parts staying screwed in over time.

Overall, this is a decent set for the price.  And, it’s the best fireplace tool set in this particular price range.  However, if you’re looking for a heavy-duty option that’s going to last years to come, we suggest going with one of our other picks.  You may be paying more, but in the long run, it’s worth it.

best mixing bowls

Best Mixing Bowls – Stainless Steel & Plastic

If you’re looking for the best mixing bowls, we searched high and low for the best all-around mixing bowls on the market.  And, if you are specifically looking for stainless steel mixing bowls, you’re in luck.  We found 6 high quality stainless steel mixing bowls that surely compliment your kitchen.

If you’re looking for plastic mixing bowls, we found one set that is extremely durable and BPA free.  It is also a consumer favorite.

And, if you’re not sure if you should go with a stainless steel set or a plastic set, we have a small guide to help you sort out the differences.

Best Mixing Bowls Buyer’s Guide

Should I go with a stainless steel or plastic set of mixing bowls?

Both of these options are lightweight and durable.  However, there is one big distinction between the two.

According to FOOD52, plastic tends to absorb odors and oil.  Additionally, plastic is prone to stains.  Especially if you will be prepping with beets, blueberries, tomato sauce and the like.  

And then, the other difference is the texture.  Some people may prefer plastic over stainless steel because sometimes stainless steel can feel like fingernails on a chalkboard.  Of course, not everyone feels this way but there are people that do.  So, be sure to take this into consideration because cooking and baking should be enjoyable.

In the end, whatever you choose to go is most likely personal preference.  And, like we mentioned previously, our pick for the best plastic mixing bowls is BPA free.  So, you’re not going to be mixing any harmful chemicals in with the chocolate chip cookies.

 

Best Mixing Bowls

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
All-Clad MBSET Stainless Steel Dishwasher Safe Mixing Bowls
All-Clad
MBSET Stainless Steel Dishwasher Safe Mixing Bowls
18/10 Stainless Steel
Non-Slip Handles
Drip-Free Rim
Dishwasher Safe
1.5 Quart
3 Quart
5 Quart
KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set
KitchenAid
3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set
18/8 Stainless Steel
Non-Slip Handles
Non-Slip Base
Dishwasher Safe
3 Quart
5 Quart
15 Quart
The Pampered Chef Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set of 3
The Pampered Chef
Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set of 3
Brushed Stainless Steel
Silicone Thumb Hole
Silicone Base
Pour Spout
Metric Measurements
Dishwasher Safe
2 Quart
4 Quart
6 Quart
OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set
OXO Good Grips
3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set
Brushed Stainless Steel
Plastic Exterior
Non-Slip Base
Dishwasher Safe
1.5 Quart
3 Quart
5 Quart
KUKPO Mixing Bowls
KUKPO
Mixing Bowls
BPA-Free Plastic
Non-Slip Handles
Non-Slip Base
Pour Spout
Dishwasher Safe
1.8 Quart
3.6 Quart
6.5 Quart
Bellemain Stainless Steel Non-Slip Mixing Bowls with Lids
Bellemain
Stainless Steel Non-Slip Mixing Bowls with Lids
18/10 Stainless Steel
BPA-Free Silicone Lids
Silicone Base
Metric Measurements
Dishwasher Safe
1 Quart
1.5 Quart
3 Quart
5 Quart
FINEDINE Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls
FINEDINE
Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls
Stainless Steel
Dishwasher Safe
.75 Quart
1 Quart
1.5 Quart
3 Quart
4 Quart
5 Quart
8 Quart

 

Best Mixing Bowls

All-Clad MBSET Stainless Steel Dishwasher Safe Mixing Bowls

All-Clad MBSET Stainless Steel Dishwasher Safe Mixing Bowls

Our first pick for best stainless steel mixing bowls is one of the most exquisite sets available.  The All-Clad MBSET Stainless Steel Dishwasher Safe Mixing Bowls comes from a company that has been around for nearly 5 decades and produces cookware with American-made steel.

This set of stainless steel mixing bowls are made with high quality 18/10 steel, also known as 304 grade stainless steel.  And, according to Mightynest, 18/10 stainless steel is made of 18% chromium and 10% nickel.  It is durable, corrosion resistant and safeguards against chemical transfer.

The All-Clad MBSET Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls are stackable and come with a 1.5 quart, 3 quart and 5 quart capacity mixing bowls.  And, all together, they weigh 7 pounds.

These stainless steel mixing bowls feature a rolled rim for drip-free pours.  In addition, they come with handles for an easy grip.

Finally, this set of mixing bowls is dishwasher safe.

Pros:

This company makes high quality stainless steel cookware and these mixing bowls are no different.  Furthermore, the handles offer a superb grip and the drip-free edges are a thoughtful bonus.  

Cons:

Some consumers have complained these mixing bowls are on the small side.  Additionally, since they are stainless steel, they will scratch.

KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set

KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set

This next pick for best mixing bowls is made of heavy gauge, 18/8 stainless steel.  The KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set is durable, rust-resistant and corrosion-resistant.

These stainless steel mixing bowls set are a nesting-style set which comes with a 3 quart, 5 quart and 15 quart bowl.

The KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set features seemless handles which provide a slip-free grip.  In addition, each mixing bowl comes with a non-slip base to prevent bowls from sliding around on the counter.  This non-slip base will also protect the countertops from damage such as scratching.

Lastly, this set of stainless steel mixing bowls is dishwasher safe.  And, they come in your choice of colors:  Candy Apple Red or Stainless Steel.

Pros:

The KitchenAid 3-Piece Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set, in our opinion, have the perfect array of sizes.  And, at a little over 4 pounds, they are a nice weight.    

Cons:

If you decide to go with the Candy Apple Red color, some consumers have complained the color chips off.

Furthermore, there have been complaints the edge of the rim is sharp and uncomfortable.

The Pampered Chef Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set of 3

The Pampered Chef Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set of 3

We are a huge fan of The Pampered Chef and this set of mixing bowls further validates our love for this company.  The Pampered Chef Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set offers the perfect solutions for all of our prepping issues.

First, this set of mixing bowls come with metric marks on the inside to get the precise measurement without dirtying a measuring cup.  Next, each bowl comes with a built-in, drip-free pour spout.  Finally, these bowls have a padded thumb hole to stabalize the bowls while you’re whisking away.  And, if you’re so inclined, you can use these thumb holes for hook storage.

The Pampered Chef Stainless Steel Mixing Bowl Set is made of high quality, brushed stainless steel.  This stainless steel is resistant to rust and corrosion.

Furthermore, these stainless steel mixing bowls have a silicone bottom for a slip-free prepping session.  In addition, this silicone bottom will help to protect the countertops from damage.

And, not only does this set come with a silicone bottom, but silicone lids as well.  This makes it easy to transport or refrigerate.

This set includes a 2 quart, 4 quart and 6 quart mixing bowl.  They are dishwasher safe, refrigerator safe and freezer safe.

Pros:

What can we say?  There are a lot of positives to this set of stainless steel mixing bowls.  From the pour spout, to the thumb/storage holes, to the silicone bottom, and of course, the silicone lids.

Cons:

Some consumers have complained the lids tend to pop off.

In addition, the edges are a bit sharp and uncomfortable.

OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set

OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set

This pick for best mixing bowls is a great option for those who are undecided about whether to go with stainless steel or plastic.  The OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set is made of quality, brushed stainless steel with a plastic exterior.  And, this plastic exterior is beneficial as it will help to protect the hands when dealing with hot foods.

This stainless steel mixing bowl set comes with a 1.5 quart, 3 quart and 5 quart bowls which nest inside of eachother for easy storing.  And, they are lightweight at 3.4 pounds.

Each bowl in the OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set features a non-skid bottom for a slip-free prep session.  Furthermore, this non-skid bottom will help protect the counters from damage.

Finally, this set of stainless steel mixing bowls is dishwasher safe.

Pros:

The OXO Good Grips 3-Piece Stainless-Steel Mixing Bowl Set is sturdy and extremely durable.

In addition, because of the stainless steel interior and the plastic exterior, they retain heat well.  And, when dealing with heat, the plastic exterior is a great alternative to hot pads or oven mitts.  

Cons:

A couple of consumers have complained about rusting.  However, most consumers haven’t reported on this particular problem.  The best advice we could give is to make sure these bowls are completely dry before storing.

KUKPO Mixing Bowls

This pick for best mixing bowls is in the plastic category.  And, like we stated previously, this is BPA-free plastic.  So, this set of mixing bowls won’t be transferring chemicals onto your food.

The KUKPO Mixing Bowls come in 3 sizes:  1.8 quart, 3.6 quart and 6.5 quart.  And, these are nesting-style of bowls, so you can store them away convienently.

This set of mixing bowls feature “easy grip handles.”  These handles consist of non-slip rubber.  In addition, the base of these bowls offer a non-skid bottom to protect the countertops and to keep things steady while mixing.

And, perhaps one of our favorite features is the easy pour spout.  So, you can say goodbye to sloppy pouring with these bowls.  

Finally, the KUKPO Mixing Bowls are dishwasher and freezer safe.

Pros:

We love the pour spout and this features is one of our favorites of any mixing bowl.

In addition, these bowls are fairly deep which help to keep the food inside the bowl while mixing.  

Cons:

The bottom is rounded which makes them a bit unstable.  However, some cooks prefer the rounded bottoms better.

Furthermore, some consumers have complained these mixing bowls are not all that sturdy.

Bellemain Stainless Steel Non-Slip Mixing Bowls with Lids

Bellemain Stainless Steel Non-Slip Mixing Bowls with Lids

These mixing bowls are likely the most budget-friendly picks on our list.  However, the Bellemain Stainless Steel Non-Slip Mixing Bowls look anything but budget-friendly.

This set of 4 mixing bowls come in the following sizes:  1 quart, 1.5 quart, 3 quart and 5 quart.  And, these mixing bowls are lightweight at 3.9 pounds.

The Bellemain Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls are made of 18/10 stainless steel with silicone coating on the bottom.  This silicone coating is slip-resistant and will help protect the countertop from scratching.

In addition, this pick for best mixing bowls comes with BPA-free silicone lids.  This will help secure the food while you transport, refrigerate or freeze.

The Bellemain Mixing Bowls feature metric measurements on the inside of each bowl.  And, this will help maximize your time in the kitchen and prevent you from needlessly dirtying a measuring cup.

These mixing bowls are dishwasher safe and they are able to go in the oven at a maximum 390 degree temperature Fahrenheit.

Pros:

Lids, metric measurement, BPA-free, 18/10 stainless steel, oven-friendly…need we say more?  Oh, yes, we do!  These are also budget-friendly.  You can’t get much better than all of that.

Cons:

There is no convienent pour spout or functional edge that allows for a drip-free pour.

 

FINEDINE Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls

FINEDINE Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls

Our final pick for best mixing bowls come with a whopping 6 bowls in total.  The FINEDINE Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls comes with the following sizes:  .75 quart, 1.5 quart, 3 quart, 4 quart, 5 quart and 8 quart.

These mixing bowls are made with commercial-grade stainless steel that are rust and corrosion-resistant.

The FINEDINE Stainless Steel Mixing Bowls feature a wide rim for even pouring and a flat base to stabilize the bowls while mixing.

Finally, this set of mixing bowls can be stored in the refrigerator and freezer.  In addition, they are dishwasher-safe.

Pros:

You get a lot of bang for your buck with these mixing bowls.  In addition, they are extremely sturdy.

Cons:

They don’t have all the bells and whistles like some of our other picks.  There is no pour spout or non-slip base.

best blankets for beds

Best Blankets for Beds – All Year Round Solutions

If you’re looking for the best blankets for beds, we reviewed a ton of blankets and came away with 7 comfortable and cozy picks.  And not only are these blankets comfortable and cozy, they are stylish too.

So, what were we looking for when we went on the hunt for the best blankets for beds?  Well, first, we scouted out quality.  These blankets need to hold up to the nightly abuse we put them through.  This means we picked out the best blankets for beds with quality material that won’t pill or mat.  In addition, the material of these blankets all feel luxurious and soft to the touch.

best blankets for beds

Furthermore, we also looked for a variety of blankets to suit just about anyone’s needs.  So, whether you’re looking for a blanket to provide you with warmth in the winter months and a cool down in the summer months, we have a blanket for you.  If you’re looking for a blanket strictly for the winter months, we picked out some of the coziest blankets suitable for even Jack Frost.

And, not only have we picked out blankets in every temperature range, there are blankets for every decor, from classic to modern.  And, there are quite a few for the cozy cabin-like feel.  We made sure there is a blanket for everyone.

So, when we gathered all the blankets we thought were elligible to be on our best blankets for beds list, we narrowed them down to the final 7 best blankets for beds according to consumer reviews.  We paid close attention to both positive and negative reviews and came out with some winners.  And, ever since we picked out our final 7 best blankets, we sleep very well at night. 

 

Best Blankets for Beds

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Tommy Bahama 216397 Bahama Coast White Cotton Blanket
Tommy Bahama
216397 Bahama Coast White Cotton Blanket
100% Cotton
Basketweave Woven
Color Options
Full/Queen
King
Creswick Australian Mills Luxurious All-Natural Alpaca/Lambswool Oversized Blanket
Creswick Australian Mills
Luxurious All-Natural Alpaca/Lambswool Oversized Blanket
70% Lambswool
30% Alpaca
Hypo-Allergenic
Material Options
Color Options
Size Options
Twin
Full/Queen
King
Utopia Bedding Cotton Throw Blanket
Utopia Bedding
Cotton Throw Blanket
100% Ring Spun Cotton
Hypo-Allergenic
Color Options
Twin
Full/Queen
King
EFFORTLESS BEDDING Plush Semi-Fitted Bed Blanket
EFFORTLESS BEDDING
Plush Semi-Fitted Bed Blanket
100% Polyester
Deep Pockets
Elastic Footing
Color Options
Twin/XL
Full/Queen
King
California King
Genteele Luxurious Velvet Fleece Blanket
Genteele
Luxurious Velvet Fleece Blanket
100% Polyester
Reversible
Color Options
Twin
Full/Queen
King
Himalaya Trading Company Luxury 100% Cashmere Bed Blanket
Himalaya Trading Company
Luxury 100% Cashmere Bed Blanket
100% Cashmere
Silk Satin Border
Queen
JBFF 250 Thread Microfiber Reverse to Fleece Goose Down Alternative Blanket
JBFF
250 Thread Microfiber Reverse to Fleece Goose Down Alternative Blanket
100% Polyester
Alternative Fiber Fill
3" Binding
Twin
Full/Queen
King

 

Best Blankets for Beds

Tommy Bahama 216397 Bahama Coast White Cotton Blanket

Tommy Bahama 216397 Bahama Coast White Cotton Blanket

Our first pick for best blankets for beds is a woven blanket made of 100% cotton.  It features a basketweave texture that’s classic in style and will keep you warm on a cold night and cool during the warm summer nights.

The Tommy Bahama 216397 Bahama Coast Cotton Blanket comes in your choice of Full/Queen or King.  And, it comes in your choice of colors:  White, Ecru or Pelican Grey.  You can find all these options here.

This blanket is hemmed on all sides to ensure the blanket stays raveled.  Additionally, this blanket is machine washable and will keep its shape wash after wash.

Our final take:  The Tommy Bahama 216397 Bahama Coast White Cotton Blanket is as classic as you can get.  It has a soft cotton feel and the texture makes it comfortable and inviting.  Furthermore, this makes a great layering piece for the winter months and in the summer, it works great as a standalone blanket if you get too hot.  Tommy Bahama produces quality products and it’s hard to wrong with this brand in terms of style and quality.

Creswick Australian Mills Luxurious All-Natural Alpaca/Lambswool Oversized Blanket

Creswick Australian Mills Luxurious All-Natural Alpaca/Lambswool Oversized Blanket

This is by far one of the more luxurious blankets you can own.  The Creswick Australian Mills Luxurious All-Natural Oversized Blanket is made with 30% alpaca and 70% lambswool.  And, with this combination, this blanket will ensure your warmth in the winter and give you a cool down in the summer.

Additionally, this blanket is great for those who suffer from allergies.  It is naturally hypo-allergenic and itch-free.  It also keeps you dry, so if you’re prone to perspiring during the night, this is a great solution for you.

The Creswick Australian Mill Luxurious All-Natural Blanket is a twin-sized blanket that is over-sized.  It measures 72 inches wide and 90 inches long.  It also includes a fold-over hem.

Furthermore, this blanket is made with high-quality materials that will not pill nor mat.  And, it is dry clean only.

If you’re looking for different size, color or material options, you can find those here.

Our final take:  With the alpaca and lambswool blend, this blanket is soft, cozy and warm.  And, if you’ve ever wanted to bask in the feel of luxury, this is your chance.  It also makes a great throw for the sofa – cup of tea and a book not included. 

Utopia Bedding Cotton Throw Blanket

Utopia Bedding Cotton Throw Blanket

This pick for best blankets for beds is a great budget option.  The Utopia Bedding Cotton Throw Blanket looks great and doesn’t cost a fortune.

This blanket is woven with 100% ring spun cotton.  Ring spun cotton tends to be softer and more durable than regular cotton, which makes it a great material for a blanket.

And, this blanket is light in weight and great for summer, as well as, the winter months.  It helps to regulate the temperature while allowing for a breathable sleep.

In addition, the Utopia Bedding Cotton Throw Blanket is made of all-natural material and no harmful chemicals or synthetic materials are used in the production of this blanket.  So, this blanket is great for those who are prone to allergies.

The Utopia Bedding Cotton Throw Blanket can be used as a thermal blanket for the bed or as a throw for the sofa.  It comes in Twin, Full/Queen or King sizes and your choice of color:  White or Gray.

To care for this blanket, just machine wash and tumble dry on low.  And, it is recommended to wash separately before use to reduce lint.

Our final take:  This is another blanket that’s great for layering in the winter months.  Additionally, in the summer months, this a great blanket as a standalone piece.  It has a classic look to it at an extremely affordable price.  

EFFORTLESS BEDDING Plush Semi-Fitted Bed Blanket

EFFORTLESS BEDDING Plush Semi-Fitted Bed Blanket

For those who like their bedding to be plush, this a great pick for you.  The EFFORTLESS BEDDING Plush Semi-Fitted Bed Blanket is made of 100% polyester.  It comes in your choice of Twin/XL, Full, Queen, King and California King sizes.  In addition, you can choose between the following colors:  Sage Green, Gardenia, Blue, Dark Gray, Pink Leopard or Sand Shell.

This blanket comes with elastic at the foot end to ensure the blanket stays put throughout the night.  In addition, this blanket is oversized with deep pockets – which is sometimes a necessity for mattresses with more depth.  However, if you have a standard depth mattress, this would work great as an oversized fitted blanket.

The EFFORTLESS BEDDING Plush Semi-Fitted Bed Blanket is the perfect layer for the winter months and great as a standalone blanket for the summer months.

To care for this blanket, simply machine wash with like colors on a gentle cycle and tumble dry low.

Our final take:  Some of us love plush and this blanket is for those of us who love plush.  Furthermore, this blanket is extremely cozy, cuddly and comfortable.  The other aspect we love about this blanket is the elastic on the foot end of the blanket which helps it stay in place.  However, if you’re looking for a blanket for the bed and the sofa, this might not be the best pick for you.

Genteele Luxurious Velvet Fleece Blanket

Genteele Luxurious Velvet Fleece Blanket

This blanket is not only lightweight, it is cozy and warm.  The Genteele Luxurious Velvet Fleece Blanket is the ultimate cuddly blanket made of 100% polyester.

And, not only is this blanket soft to the touch, this blanket comes in an array of soft, zen-like colors.  Choose between Charcoal, Purple, Light Taupe, Silver Gray or Winter Ivory.  Furthermore, it comes in your choice of sizes:  Twin, Full/Queen or King.

The Genteele Luxurioius Velvet Fleece Blanket is perfect for the cold winter nights or the nights spent reading a book on the couch.  In the summer months, this blanket would make a great standalone piece.

To care for this blanket, machine wash in cold water on a gentle cycle.  Let air dry or tumble dry on low.

Our final take:  This is another pick that’s for those that love plush.  And, what’s great about this particular blanket is it’s lightweight and plush.  So, this is a great choice for those that don’t want something too thick, and for those looking to layer.  

Himalaya Trading Company Luxury 100% Cashmere Bed Blanket

Himalaya Trading Company Luxury 100% Cashmere Bed Blanket

What’s better than cashmere?  A blanket made out of cashmere.  The Himalaya Trading Company Luxury 100% Cashmere Bed Blanket comes with a 1.5 inch, 100% silk satin border.

This blanket is made of lightweight cashmere yarn in a twill-style pattern.  It is great for all year round, although especially in the winter months, the cashmere is a definite treat.

This blanket comes in a queen size and is available in this denim blue color.  To care for this blanket, it is recommended that you dry clean only.

Our final take:  We have a soft spot for cashmere, especially when it’s cold outside.  Cashmere is as soft as you can get, it is warm and it has a silk-like feel.  Of course, you always pay for luxury one way or the other.  And, with this blanket you will.  Additionally, it is dry clean only so the maintanence may be more than other blankets.  However, it’s a small price to pay for something that feels so good.  

JBFF 250 Thread Microfiber Reverse to Fleece Goose Down Alternative Blanket

JBFF 250 Thread Microfiber Reverse to Fleece Goose Down Alternative Blanket

This pick for best blankets for beds is a comforter-style, filled blanket.  The JBFF 250 Thread Microfiber Reverse to Fleece Goose Down Alternative Blanket is made of 100% polyester, with one side featuring a microfiber type of texture and the other side a woven stripe texture.

The JBFF Microfiber Down Alternative Blanket features a box stitch construction with 3 inches of binding on the edges.  

This blanket is filled with down alternative fiber and is plenty warm for the winter months while being just right for the summer months.

To care for this blanket, simply machine wash and tumble dry on low.

Our final take:  This is great solution for those that would like a blanket and comforter all-in-one.  The JBFF Alternative Blanket is a comforter on one side and a blanket on the other.  Additionally, it’s low-maintanence for what you get, so for those who don’t like the fuss, this is a blanket to consider.  

best futon for sleeping

Best Futon for Sleeping – Style, Comfort and Quality

Are you looking for the best futon for sleeping?  How about the best futon for a comfortable and supportive night’s sleep?

We picked out 6 of the best futons that are not only comfortable to sit in, they’re absolutely dreamy to sleep on.

There were a few requirements we thought were necessary when picking out final 8 best futons for sleeping:

  • Style
  • Comfort
  • Quality
  • Durability

When it comes to style, a futon is often the centerpiece of a room.  So, of course, it needs to look good.

Our next requirement is comfort.  And, this is often relative to each individual preference.  However, we erred on the side of the most popular type of mattress when picking out these futons.  And, the most popular type of mattress tends to be soft, yet firm, but not too firm – just right. Furthermore, the futons we chose all offer good back support to prevent those aches and pains we sometimes get from sleeping on less than desirable mattresses.

best futon for sleeping 

Then, we focused in on quality.  Whether theses futons are built with wood, metal or plastic, they have to made with the best materials available.  In addition, the materials of each mattress, including the fabric, have to be top notch.

Finally, durability is extremely important.  And, often this goes hand in hand with quality.  If quality materials are used, durability is pretty much a given.  However, these materials need to be put together with sturdy construction and we made sure these futons are built to last.

Once we gathered all the futons that met our requirements, we zoomed in on consumer reviews.  And, depending on how well each futon rated in terms of comfort, quality and durability according to consumers, we narrowed our picks down to the best futons for sleeping based on overall customer satisfaction.

And, our final picks are a well-rounded bunch that will comfortably accomodate sleep-filled nights and movie marathons.  

 

Best Futon for Sleeping

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Raw Futons Colorado Reclaim Futon Sofa Bed
Raw Futons
Colorado Reclaim Futon Sofa Bed
Wood
Hardwood Construction
7-Inch Mattress
294 Hinged Springs
Color/Design Options
76" x 37" x 33"
Jerry Sales Up North Futon Lodge Full Size Sofa Bed
Jerry Sales
Up North Futon Lodge Full Size Sofa Bed
Hardwood Construction
8-Inch Mattress
294 Hinged Springs
Color Options
81" x 37" x 33"
Generic Tweed Memory BC-281 Foam Futon
Generic
Tweed Memory BC-281 Foam Futon
Wood Frame
Plastic Legs
Split Back Style
Memory Foam
Color Options
71.65" x 33.46" x 32.48
DHP Premium Westbury Linen Pillowtop Futon
DHP
Premium Westbury Linen Pillowtop Futon
Wood Construction
Pillowtop
3 Sitting/Sleeping Positions
70" x 34.5" x 31"
Kodiak Montreal X Futon Sofa Bed Set
Kodiak
Montreal X Futon Sofa Bed Set
Hardwood Construction
8-Inch Mattress
Color Options
80" x 37" x 33"
Mozaic 10-Inch Suede Gel Pocket Coil Futon MattressWood Construction
Cooling Gel Foam
15-Gauge Coils
Color Options
80" x 60" x 10"

 

Best Futon for Sleeping

Raw Futons Colorado Reclaim Futon Sofa Bed

#1.  Raw Futons Colorado Reclaim Futon Sofa Bed

Our first pick for best futon for sleeping comes in 25 different color and design combinations.  The fabric varies from soft suede to faux leather.  In addition, it also varies in texture from smooth to corduroy.

The Raw Futons Colorado Reclaim Futon Sofa Bed is a full size futon bed made of plantation grown hardwood.  And, it comes with a 7-inch innerspring mattress with 294 hinged springs.

This mattress is vacuum-packed for shipment.  So, you will need a little time to let it expand before use.  And thankfully, the futon itself is fairly easy to assemble.

The Raw Futons Colorado Reclaim Futon Sofa Bed frame measures 76 inches long, 37 inches wide and 33 inches high.  The mattress measures 75 inches long, 54 inches wide and 7 inches high.

Pros:

This futon is extremely comfortable to sleep on.  The best way to describe it is firm, yet comfortable.  In addition, it comes in 25 various colors and designs, so matching this futon to your decor just got a lot easier.

Cons:

When adjusting the futon from couch position to bed position, the frame moves rather easily.  However, when positioning it from the bed to the couch position, it’s a bit tricky due to the weight of the mattress.  You may need an extra hand in order to accomplish this.

Furthermore, this futon is deep when in the couch position, making it difficult to get in and out of for those suffering from knee or back problems.  However, this is can be an easy fix if you add some throw pillows.

 

Jerry Sales Up North Futon Lodge Full Size Sofa Bed

#2.  Jerry Sales Up North Futon Lodge Full Size Sofa Bed

This pick for best futon for sleeping is a cozy, log cabin style option.  And, it comes in your choice of 6 different colors.  It also comes in a variety of fabrics ranging from faux leather, soft suede-like material and a twill-textured fabric.  Choose between Leather Havana Rustic, Leather Havana Universal, Marmont Thunder Fabric, Mushroom Walnut, Sand Walnut and Vanilla Walnut.  

The Jerry Sales Up North Futon Lodge Full Size Sofa Bed has a log-like, solid hardwood construction built with plantation grown wood.  And, this futon is ultra durable with the frame weighing approximately 122 pounds and the mattress weighing approximately 53 pounds.

The mattress is an 8 inch innerspring mattress with 294 coil hinged springs.  Additionally, it is filled with high-density foam.  And, all of this combined will allow for a supportive night’s sleep.

The Jerry Sales Up North Futon Lodge Full Size Sofa Bed frame measures 81 inches long, 37 inches wide and 33 inches high.  The bed dimensions measure 81 inches long, 54.5 inches wide and 25 inches high.

Pros:

This futon has a high-back and is extremely comfortable.  The mattress is supportive with a medium-firmness, so it’s not too firm and it’s not something you will sink into.  We like to call it “just right.”

Additionally, this futon is easy to assemble and no tools are needed.

Cons:

The mattress arrives tightly packed up.  So, it will take at least a day to let it expand once it’s unwrapped.

 

Generic Tweed Memory BC-281 Foam Futon

#3.  Generic Tweed Memory BC-281 Foam Futon

This pick for best futon for sleeping is a modern yet space-saving option.  The Generic Tweed Memory BC-281 Foam Futon is a split back style of futon in which you can adjust one or both of the backs to your desired comfort.

The Generic Tweed Memory BC-281 Foam Futon provides memory foam with recycled foam stuffing.  As shown, it is covered with a grey polyester tweed.  However, it also comes in a brown color which you can find here.

This split back futon is constructed with a wooden frame and plastic legs.  But, don’t let the plastic legs fool you, these legs are ultra sturdy.

The Generic Tweed Memory BC-281 Foam Futon is 71.65 inches long, 33.46 inches wide and 32.48 inches high.  And, with this futon, you have the option to have this futon expertly assembled before arrival.

Pros:

Because this futon is made with memory foam, it’s going to form to your body, allowing for exact support.

Furthermore, this futon is constructed with durable materials which will give it some longevity.

Cons:

The Generic Tweed Memory BC-281 Foam Futon is only 71.65 inches long.  While this is great for someone looking for a space-saving option, it’s not so great for a 6 foot individual.

 

DHP Premium Westbury Linen Pillowtop Futon

#4.  DHP Premium Westbury Linen Pillowtop Futon

This pick for best futon for sleeping has a pillow top layer for extra comfort while sitting, lounging and sleeping.  The DHP Premium Westbury Linen Pillowtop Futon can be converted to these three different positions with just a click of the back.  And, your desired position is reached within seconds.

This futon is constructed with wooden legs and covered in a soft linen fabric.  In addition, it has tufted detailing that gives this pillow top futon a finished and inviting look.

The DHP Premium Westbury Linen Pillowtop Futon measures 70 inches long, 34.5 inches wide and 31 inches high.

Pros:

Like we mentioned previously, this futon has 3 different comfort levels:  sitting, lounging and sleeping.  In addition, it is extremely comfortable and durable.

And, on a comfort scale, this futon is rather firm – don’t let the pillowtop fool you.  So, if you prefer a firm, sleep-filled night, this is a great pick for you.

Cons:

Some people don’t care for firm, but rather somewhere in between firm and cushion-y.  Therefore, this may not be a great pick for everyone.

Furthermore, this is a smaller-sized futon which is a great space-saving option.  However, if you’re taller than 70 inches, this might not be the best option for you.

 

Kodiak Montreal X Futon Sofa Bed Set

#5.  Kodiak Montreal X Futon Sofa Bed Set

This futon not only allows you to sit and sleep, it also allows you to store.  The Kodiak Montreal X Futon Sofa Bed Set comes equipped with 2 slide out drawers perfect for pillows or blankets.

This futon is a queen sized futon, which will comfortably sleep 2 people.  And, when we say comfortably, we mean 8 inch innerspring mattress with cotton and foam comfortably.

The Kodiak Montreal X Futon Sofa Bed Set is made with solid wood and comes in your choice of 12 different colors of fabric.  In addition, there are different options with the fabric ranging from faux leather to a twill-like material.

This futon frame measures 80 inches long, 37 inches wide and 33 inches high.  The mattress measures 75 inches long, 54 inches wide and 8 inches high.

Pros:

This pick for best futon for sleeping comes with stoppers on the bottom of the seat for securing it in position.

Furthermore, consumers rave about how comfortable this futon is to sit and sleep on.  Could it have anything to do with the whopping 8 inch mattress?

Cons:

While it’s fairly easy to place in the sleeping position, because the mattress is so thick, it is hard to place back upright.  Therefore, you may need 2 people to complete this task.

Some consumers find the assembly difficult because of poor instructions.  However, some consumers have had no trouble.  With this one you might have to wing it.

 

Mozaic 10-Inch Suede Gel Pocket Coil Futon Mattress

#6.  Mozaic 10-Inch Suede Gel Pocket Coil Futon Mattress

Our last pick is a great one for those who tend to get too hot during the night.  And this is because it has a half-inch of cooling gel foam to keep you from overheating throughout the night.

The Mozaic 10-Inch Suede Gel Pocket Coil Futon has a queen-sized mattress consisting of convoluted foam, cotton and polyester fiber, 15-gauge pocket coils and gel foam.  And, this mattress is covered in sueded polyester and comes in 14 different color options.

This futon measures 80 inches long, 60 inches wide and 10 inches high.

Pros:

This mattress is super comfortable, not too firm but just firm enough.

In addition, this futon, at 80 inches long, will accommodate taller individuals very comfortably.

Cons:

While it’s easy to fold down to a bed, it’s not so easy to fold up to a seating position.  You may need a second set of muscles to achieve this.

Furthermore, the mattress arrives vacuum-packed.  So, you may need a couple of days to let it expand.

In Conclusion:

If you’re not entirely set on a futon, sleeper sofas are another option to consider.  You can take a browse through these 8 comfortable and sleep-worthy picks here.

best outdoor rugs for rain

Best Outdoor Rugs for Rain, Sleet and Snow

When we began our search for the best outdoor rugs for rain, we had a few requirements that would ensure we picked out only the top rugs on the market.

And, style was first on our list of requirements in our search for the best outdoor rugs for rain.  Furthermore, because we all have different tastes and decor, we chose an assortment of rugs ranging from classic to contemporary to artistic and even a rug that replicates grass.

Once we had a style that would suit just about everyone, we focused in on durability.  Our picks for best outdoor rugs for rain had to endure high traffic in soggy conditions.

best outdoor rugs for rain

And, when it comes to soggy conditions, mildew and mold are often prevalent.  So, our final picks are all mildew and mold resistant.

Finally, and of course, logically, our final picks are all made to handle rain, snow and sleet.  And not only these blistering weather patterns, but a good cleaning with the hose, also.

So, after extensive research and reviewing satisfied and dissatisfied consumer responses, we narrowed our list down to 8 of the most stylish and highly-regarded outdoor rugs that will endure the most treacherous of weather conditions.

 

Best Outdoor Rugs for Rain

 FeaturesSpecsPrice
Oriental Weavers Karavia Outdoor Rug
Oriental Weavers
Karavia Outdoor Rug
100% Polypropylene
UV Protection
Mildew/Mold Resistant
Color/Design Options
Runner Option
Round Option
1'9" x 3'9"
2'5" x 4'5"
2'25" x 7'5"
3'7" x 5'6"
5'3" x 7'6"
6'7" x 9'6"
7'10" x 7'10"
8'6" x 13'
Gertmenian Brown Jordan Prime Label Patio Furniture Rug
Gertmenian
Brown Jordan Prime Label Patio Furniture Rug
100% Polypropylene
UV Protection
Mildew/Mold Resistant
Color/Design Options
5'1/4" x 7'5"
8' x 10'
9' x 13'
Safavieh Courtyard Collection CY8680-37221 Indoor/Outdoor Area Rug
Safavieh
Courtyard Collection CY8680-37221 Indoor/Outdoor Area Rug
100% Polypropylene
Mildew/Mold Resistant
Color/Design Options
2'3" x 12'
5'3" x 7'7"
6'7" x 6'7"
Liora Manne Whimsy Beach Boards Indoor/Outdoor Rug
Liora Manne
Whimsy Beach Boards Indoor/Outdoor Rug
100% Polypropylene
UV Protection
Color/Design Options
5' x 7'6"
20" x 30"
24" x 36"
27" x 72"
30" x 48"
42" x 56"
Nuloom Machine Made Kathleen Outdoor Krem Rug
Nuloom
Machine Made Kathleen Outdoor Krem Rug
100% Polypropylene
Mildew/Mold Resistant
Color/Design Options
8'6" x 13'
RRI Home Decor Sonya Indoor/Outdoor Oval Reversible Braided Rug
RRI Home Decor
Sonya Indoor/Outdoor Oval Reversible Braided Rug
65% Polypropylene
35% Nylon
UV Protection
Mildew/Mold Resistant
Color Options
2' x 3'
2' x 4'
3' x 5'
4' x 6'
5' x 8'
7' x 9'
8' x 11'
10' x 13'
iCustomRug Outdoor Turf Rug in Green Artificial Grass
iCustomRug
Outdoor Turf Rug in Green Artificial Grass
100% Synthetic Material
Marine Backing
UV Resistant
5'6" x 6' - 20'
8' x 20'
11'9" x 4' - 26'
Nourison Aloha Multicolor Rectangle Area Rug
Nourison
Aloha Multicolor Rectangle Area Rug
100% Polypropylene
Machine Washable
Stain-Resistant
Color/Design Options
2'8 x 4'
3'6" x 5'6"
5'3" x 7'5"
7'10" x 10'6"
9'6" x 13"

 

Best Outdoor Rugs for Rain

 

Oriental Weavers Karavia Outdoor Rug

Oriental Weavers Karavia Outdoor Rug

First up for best outdoor rugs for rain is a neutral-colored rug that will compliment just about any decor.

The Oriental Weavers Karavia Outdoor Rug is made of 100% polypropylene and is berber-weaved which makes it ultra durable.

In addition, berber-style carpets are usually easier to maintain than normal-style carpets.  And this is because spills and dirt tend to sit on top of the carpet rather than seep through.  So, in order to care for this rug, all you need to do is use a mild soap and wipe it down with a damp cloth.

The Oriental Weavers Karavia Outdoor Rug is mold and mildew resistant.  It also offers UV protection to prevent fading from the sun and other weather elements.

This outdoor rug comes in 14 different sizes, so you should be able to find a rug that fits like a glove.  Furthermore, it also comes in a round and runner size.

Pros:

Because this rug is made with a berber-style weave, this will help prevent dirt and debri from seeping through.  And, this makes it easy to clean and maintain.

Additionally, it literally comes in just about every size imaginable.  So, there’s no need to put in a special order to fit the dimensions you’re working with. 

Cons:

This rug may slip and slide, especially in wet weather conditions.  The good news is, they make outdoor rug pads for scenarios such as this.  You can find a quality outdoor rug pad here.

 

Gertmenian Brown Jordan Prime Label Patio Furniture Rug

Gertmenian Brown Jordan Prime Label Patio Furniture Rug

This is another pick that incorporates earth-toned colors.  And with this outdoor rug, you get your choice of 6 different neutral color and design combinations.  Choose between:  Angora Grey, Golden Brown, Nut Brown, Beige, Chestnut and Raven Dot Brown.

The Gertmenian Brown Jordan Prime Label Patio Furniture Rug is made of 100% polyproplylene cabled yarn, woven in an ultra-thin belgian-style of weave.  

It is resitant to mildew, mold and stains and is antimicrobial.  It is also easy to clean and care for, simply hose it off and let it air dry.

Additionally, this all-weather outdoor rug is UV-stabilized.  This makes it resistant to fading from the the sun and harsh weather conditions.

The Germenian Brown Jordan Prime Label Patio Furniture Rug comes in your choice of sizes:  5 feet .25 inches x 7 feet 5 inches, 8 feet x 10 feet and 9 feet x 13 feet.

Pros:

This rug is extremely durable and easy to clean.

Furthermore, this is a high-quality rug with many consumers raving about how beautiful it looks and how durable it is.

Cons:

If you’re looking for a soft outdoor rug, this isn’t your best option as it is a little rough to the touch.  However, the plus side is, because of the material, this rug handles harsh weather elements and cleans up very nicely.

 

Safavieh Courtyard Collection CY8680-37221 Indoor/Outdoor Area Rug

Safavieh Courtyard Collection CY8680-37221 Indoor/Outdoor Area Rug

This option for best outdoor rugs for rain is a traditional-style rug that can go with just about every decor.  And, it also comes in countless patterns which you can check out here.

The Safavieh Courtyard Collection CY8680-37221 Indoor/Outdoor Area Rug consists of power-loomed construction with high-quality polypropylene pile fiber.  This polypropylene pile fiber is the softest you can get on the market, so in terms of outdoor rugs, this rug is relatively soft and extremely durable.

This outdoor rug has a pile height of .25 inches and is mildew and mold resistant.  In addition, it is anti-microbial and stain-resistant.  To clean, simply hose it down and air dry.

The Safavieh Courtyard Collection CY8680-37221 Indoor/Outdoor Area Rug comes in 3 different sizes:  2 feet 3 inches x 12 feet, 5 feet 3 inches x 7 feet 7 inches and 6 feet 7 inches by 6 feet 7 inches.

Pros:

As far as polypropylene goes, this is the softest outdoor rug you will find made out of this material.

This rug comes in many different patterns, which makes choosing a rug to go with your decor all that much more fun.  

Cons:

It only comes in 3 different sizes so this rug may or may not fit the space you’re working with.

Even though it’s made with the softest polypropylene available, it is still a little on the rough side.  Unfortunately, this is the norm with all-weather rugs.

 

Liora Manne Whimsy Beach Boards Indoor/Outdoor Rug

Liora Manne Whimsy Beach Boards Indoor/Outdoor Rug

This handmade outdoor rug is perfect for those residing by the beach or the lake.  And, if you’re not feeling the surfboards, Liora Manne has many other “by the sea” designs to choose from.  You can take a scroll through those here.

The Liora Manne Whimsy Beach Boards Indoor/Outdoor Rug is made of 100% polypropylene.  It is constructed with a tight weave to limit the amount of dirt and debris that may try to seep through.

This outdoor rug is UV-resistant which will protect it from fading in the sun and weather elements.

The Liora Manne Indoor/Outdoor Rug comes in your choice of sizes:  5 feet x 7 feet 6 inches, 20 inches x 30 inches, 24 inches x 36 inches, 27 inches x 72 inches, 30 inches x 48 inches and 42 inches x 56 inches.

Pros:

This is a well-made rug with a tight weave which will limit dirt from being trapped inside.  In addition, this tight weave makes it easy to clean and care for.

Cons:

While this is an outdoor rug, it is not meant for heavy rain or other harsh weather elements.  It can endure some, but to keep its longevity, it is best to limit the exposure.

 

Nuloom Machine Made Kathleen Outdoor Krem Rug

Nuloom Machine Made Kathleen Outdoor Krem Rug

This is an elegant option for withstanding less than elegant conditions.

The Nuloom Machine Made Kathleen Outdoor Krem Rug is made of 100% polypropylene.  It is constructed with a tight weave to help prevent dirt and debris from becoming lodged within the carpet.  To clean, simply spot clean with water and a mild detergent.

This outdoor rug comes in many different colors and patterns and you can check out those colors and patterns here.

And with this particular rug, it only comes in one size:  8 feet 6 inches x 13 feet.

Pros:

The Nuloom Kathleen Outdoor Krem Rug is strong and sturdy and it is able to withstand strong winds without blowing around.

Cons:

Although this is an outdoor rug and can endure high-traffic, we wouldn’t recommend leaving it out in harsh weather conditions.

Furthermore, this rug doesn’t come with backing and may have a tendency to slide.  However, you can find a quality outdoor rug pad here.

 

RRI Home Decor Sonya Indoor/Outdoor Oval Reversible Braided Rug

RRI Home Decor Sonya Indoor/Outdoor Oval Reversible Braided Rug

This pick for best outdoor rugs for rain essentially has it’s own drainage system.  It is designed so the water drains through the fibers without soaking through.  In addition, since water drains right through this rug, it dries quickly and is resistant to mold and mildew.

The RRI Home Decor Sonya Indoor/Outdoor Oval Reversible Braided Rug is constructed of 65% soft polypropylene yarns and 35% nylon.  It is UV resistant which will help preserve the color and keep it from fading due to sun exposure and harsh weather elements.

This indoor/outdoor rug essentially has two lives.  When one side becomes worn, it is reversible.  So, you can simply flip it over for a fresh start.

The RRI Home Decor Sonya Indoor/Outdoor Oval Reversible Braided Rug comes in your choice of 6 different colors:  Brown Mulitcolor, Burgundy Multicolor, Denim Multicolor, Graphite Multicolor, Moss Multicolor and Sand Multicolor.  And, it also comes in 8 different sizes, so the chances you will find a rug to fit in your space is pretty high.

Pros:

This rug works well in all weather conditions.

Furthermore, when one side has had a little too much fun, you can turn it over for a fresh start.

Cons:

A couple of consumers have stated that it snags and pills easily.  However, most consumers seem happy with the quality.

 

iCustomRug Outdoor Turf Rug in Green Artificial Grass

iCustomRug Outdoor Turf Rug in Green Artificial Grass

This pick for best outdoor rugs for rain is a rather fun one.  It is made with 100% synthetic materials to replicate grass.

The iCustomRug Outdoor Turf Rug is a low-weight, low-pile rug with marine backing.  It features finished edges which will prevent the rug from fraying.

This outdoor rug for rain, sleet and snow is rain-resistant.  The rain drains through the rug, allowing the rug to dry quickly.  In addition, it is UV-stabilized, which makes it resistant to fading due to the sun or other weather elements.   

The iCustomRug Outdoor Turf Rug is easy to install, simply roll it out and leave it.  Additionally, it can be staked into the ground to ensure it stays put.

And, this rug is just as easy to clean as it is to install.  Just hose it off and let dry.

This rug comes in your choice of sizes:  5 feet 6 inches x 6 feet – 20 feet, 8 feet x 20 feet, 11 feet 9 inches x 4 feet – 26 feet.

Pros:

This rug is durable and will handle harsh weather conditions.

Furthermore, it has finished edges which gives it a completed look.

Cons:

The iCustomRug Outdoor Turf Rug may shift and move with the wind.  It’s best to keep it staked into the ground or use under calm conditions.

Additionally, some consumers have complained about the synthetic smell of this turf.  However, given enough time, this rug will air out and will eventually have a neutral scent to it.

 

Nourison Aloha Multicolor Rectangle Area Rug

Nourison Aloha Multicolor Rectangle Area Rug

Our final pick for best outdoor rugs for rain is an all-weather, stain-resistant, machine washable rug that will endure any weather condition.

The Nourison Aloha Multicolor Rectangle Area Rug is made with 100% high quality, soft polypropylene.  It is a flat woven rug with a high-low weave which gives it dimension and texture.

This outdoor rug is easy to care for.  Not only is it machine washable, but you can simply spray it down with a hose and let air dry.  And, like we mentioned previously, it is stain-resistant.

The Nourison Outdoor Rug comes in a ton of different colors and patterns for you to choose from.  And, you can take a look at those here.

Finally, the Nourison Aloha Multicolor Rectangle Area Rug comes in your choice of sizes:  2 feet 8 inches x 4 feet, 3 feet 6 inches x 5 feet 6 inches, 5 feet 3 inches x 7 feet 5 inches, 7 feet 10 inches x 10 feet 6 inches and 9 feet 6 inches x 13 feet.

Pros:

This rug is stain-resistant and machine washable.  And, this is great for when using in high traffic areas.

Additionally, it is textured with a high-low weave, which makes for a beautiful, contrasting design element.

Cons:

A couple of consumers have complained that the color faded after being left outside.  So, you may consider using this rug under a covered porch.